Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
650i
Owner's Manual for Vehicle
Congratulations, and thank you for choosing a BMW.
Thorough familiarity with your vehicle will provide you with
enhanced control and security when you drive it. We therefore
have this request:
Please take the time to read this Owner's Manual and familiarize
yourself with the information that we have compiled for you
before starting off in your new vehicle. It contains important data
and instructions intended to assist you in gaining maximum use
and satisfaction from your BMW's unique range of technical fea-
tures. The manual also contains information on maintenance
designed to enhance operating safety and contribute to main-
taining the value of your BMW throughout an extended service
life.
This manual is supplemented by a Service and Warranty Informa-
tion Booklet for US models or a Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian models.
We wish you an enjoyable driving experience.
BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
© 2007 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts,
only with the written consent of
BMW AG, Munich.
Order No. 01 41 0 013 312
US English II/07, 07 03 510
Printed in Germany
Printed on environmentally friendly paper,
bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Contents
The fastest way to find specific topics is to use
the index, refer to page 232.
Using this Owner's Manual
4 Notes
7 Reporting safety defects
At a glance
10 Cockpit
16 iDrive
22 Voice command system
Controls
28 Opening and closing
48 Adjusting
57 Transporting children safely
59 Driving
75 Everything under control
86 Technology for comfort, convenience
and safety
102 Lamps
106 Climate
112 Practical interior accessories
Driving tips
120 Things to remember when driving
Navigation
126 Starting navigation system
128 Destination entry
140 Destination guidance
149 What to do if …
Entertainment
152 On/off and tone
156 Radio
165 CD player and CD changer
171 AUX-In connection
Communications
174 Telephoning
189 BMW Assist
Mobility
198 Refueling
200 Wheels and tires
206 Under the hood
210 Maintenance
212 Replacing components
217 Giving and receiving assistance
Reference
224 Technical data
227 Short commands of voice command
system
232 Everything from A to Z
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Notes
4
Notes
Using this Owner's Manual
We have made every effort to ensure that you
are able to find what you need in this Owner's
Manual as quickly as possible. The fastest way
to find specific topics is to use the detailed
index at the back of the manual. If you wish to
gain an initial overview of your vehicle, you will
find this in the first chapter.
Should you want to sell your BMW some day,
please remember to pass on the Owner's Man-
ual as well; it is an important component of your
vehicle.
Additional sources of information
Should you have any other questions, your
BMW center will be glad to advise you at any
time.
You can find information on BMW, e.g. technol-
ogy, on the Internet at www.bmwusa.com.
Symbols used
Indicates precautions that must be fol-
lowed precisely in order to avoid the pos-
sibility of personal injury and serious damage to
the vehicle.<
Indicates information that will assist you
in gaining the optimum benefit from your
vehicle and enable you to care more effectively
for your vehicle.<
Refers to measures that can be taken to
help protect the environment.<
< Marks the end of a specific item of informa-
tion.
*
Indicates special equipment, country-spe-
cific equipment and optional extras, as well as
equipment and functions not yet available at the
time of printing.
"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to
select individual functions.
{...} Verbal instructions to use with the voice
command system.
{{...}} Identifies the answers generated by the
voice command system.
Symbols on vehicle components
Indicates that you should consult the rel-
evant section of this Owner's Manual for
information on a particular part or assembly.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
5
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
The individual vehicle
When purchasing your BMW, you have decided
in favor of a model with individualized equip-
ment and features. This Owner's Manual
describes all models and equipment offered by
BMW within the same line.
Please bear in mind that the manual may con-
tain information on accessories and equipment
that you have not specified for your own vehicle.
Sections describing options and special equip-
ment are marked by asterisks
*
to assist you in
identifying possible differences between the
descriptions in this manual and your own vehi-
cle's equipment.
If equipment in your BMW is not described in
this Owner's Manual, please refer to the accom-
panying Supplementary Owner's Manuals.
Editorial notice
BMW pursues a policy of continuous, ongoing
development that is conceived to ensure that
our vehicles continue to embody the highest
quality and safety standards combined with
advanced, state-of-the-art technology. In iso-
lated cases it is possible that the features
described in this Owner's Manual could differ
from those on your vehicle.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Notes
6
For your own safety
Maintenance and repairs
Advanced technology, e.g. the use of
modern materials and high-performance
electronics, requires specially adapted mainte-
nance and repair methods. Have corresponding
work on your BMW performed only by your
BMW center or a workshop that works accord-
ing to BMW repair procedures with appropri-
ately trained personnel. If this work is not car-
ried out properly, there is a danger of
subsequent damage and related safety haz-
ards.<
California Proposition 65 Warning
California law requires us to issue the following
warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of
automobile components and parts,
including components found in the interior fur-
nishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects and reproductive harm. In
addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or
emit chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
Battery posts, terminals and related accesso-
ries contain lead and lead compounds. Wash
your hands after handling.
Used engine oil contains chemicals that have
caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always
protect your skin by washing thoroughly with
soap and water.<
Parts and accessories
For your own safety, use genuine parts
and accessories approved by BMW.
When you purchase accessories tested and
approved by BMW and Genuine BMW Parts,
you simultaneously acquire the assurance that
they have been thoroughly tested by BMW to
ensure optimum performance when installed
on your vehicle.
BMW warrants these parts to be free from
defects in material and workmanship.
BMW will not accept any liability for damage
resulting from installation of parts and accesso-
ries not approved by BMW.
BMW cannot test every product made by other
manufacturers to verify if it can be used on a
BMW safely and without risk to either the vehi-
cle, its operation, or its occupants.
Genuine BMW Parts, BMW Accessories and
other products approved by BMW, together
with professional advice on using these items,
are available from all BMW centers.
Installation and operation of non-BMW
approved accessories such as alarms, radios,
amplifiers, radar detectors, wheels, suspension
components, brake dust shields, telephones,
including operation of any mobile phone from
within the vehicle without using an externally
mounted antenna, or transceiver equipment, for
instance, CBs, walkie-talkies, ham radios or
similar accessories, may cause extensive dam-
age to the vehicle, compromise its safety, inter-
fere with the vehicle's electrical system or affect
the validity of the BMW Limited Warranty. See
your BMW center for additional information.<
Maintenance, replacement, or repair of
the emission control devices and sys-
tems may be performed by any automotive
repair establishment or individual using any cer-
tified automotive part.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
7
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly.
Your BMW is covered by the following warran-
ties:
> New Vehicle Limited Warranty
> Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
> Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty
> Federal Emissions Performance Warranty
> California Emission Control System Limited
Warranty
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following applies only to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying BMW of North
America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New
Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone (800) 831-
1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order
a recall and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in individual
problems between you and your dealer or
BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis-
trator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada,
Defect Investigations and Recalls, may call
1-800-333-0510 toll-free from anywhere in
Canada or 1-613-993-9851 from the Ottawa
region and from other countries, or contact
Transport Canada by mail at: Transport
Canada, ASFAD, Place de Ville, Tower C,
330 Sparks Street, Ottawa, ON, K1A 0N5.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
At a glance
This overview of buttons, switches and displays
is intended to familiarize you with your vehicle's
operating environment. The section will also
assist you in becoming acquainted with the
control concepts and options available for
operating the various systems.
At a glance
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Cockpit
10
Cockpit
Around the steering wheel: controls and displays
1 Convertible: opening and closing rear
window 40
2 Convertible: opening and closing windows
together 39
3 Convertible: opening and closing rear
windows 39
4 Opening and closing front windows 39
5 Adjusting exterior mirrors 54
Automatic curb monitor 54
6
Turn signals 65
High beams,
headlamp flasher 104
Roadside parking lamps 104
Check Control 80
Computer 76
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
At a glance
11
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
7 Buttons on steering wheel
8 Instrument cluster 12
11 Ignition lock 59
12 Horn, entire surface
15 Releasing hood 206
16 Opening luggage compartment lid 34
Mobile phone
*
175
> Press: accepting and ending
call, starting dialing
*
for
selected phone number and
redialing if no phone number is
selected
> Press and hold: redialing
Volume
Activating/deactivating voice
command system
*
22
Changing radio station 156
Selecting music track 166
Scrolling in phone book and in lists
with stored phone numbers
Individually programmable
*
55
Individually programmable 55
9
Windshield wipers 66
Rain sensor 66
10
Starting/stopping engine and
switching ignition on/off 59
13
Steering wheel heater
*
55
Steering wheel adjustment 55
14
Cruise control 67
Active cruise control
*
68
17
Head-Up Display
*
97
BMW Night Vision
*
99
18
Parking lamps 102
Low beams 102
Daytime running lamps
*
103
Automatic headlamp control 102
Daytime running lamps
*
103
Adaptive Head Light
*
103
19
Instrument lighting 104
Fog lamps 104
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Cockpit
12
Instrument cluster
1 Indicator lamps for turn signals
2 Speedometer
3 Indicator and warning lamps 13
4 Displays for active cruise control
*
71
5 Tachometer 75
6 Engine oil thermometer 76
7 Display for
> Time/date 75
> Outside temperature 75
> Indicator and warning lamps 80
> Speed for cruise control 68
> Desired speed for active cruise
control
*
71
8 Display for
> Odometer and trip odometer 75
> Computer 76
> Date and remaining distance to be
driven for service requirements 78
> Automatic transmission
with Steptronic
*
63
> SMG Sequential Manual
Transmission
*
62
> Dynamic Driving Control 64
> Check Control message present 80
9 Fuel gauge 76
10 Resetting trip odometer 75
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
At a glance
13
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Indicator and warning lamps
The concept
The indicator and warning lamps can light up in
different combinations and colors.
When the engine is started or the ignition is
switched on, some lamps are checked for
proper operation and light up briefly in the pro-
cess.
Explanatory text messages
Text messages at the bottom edge of the Con-
trol Display explain the meaning of the indicator
and warning lamps displayed.
You can consult Check Control for additional
information, e.g. regarding the cause of a mal-
function or the appropriate actions to take, refer
to page 80.
In urgent cases, this information will be shown
as soon as the corresponding lamp lights up.
Indicator lamps without text messages
The following indicator lamps indicate that the
associated functions are activated:
Handbrake applied 61
Handbrake for Canadian models
Fog lamps 104
DTC Dynamic Traction Control 89
High beams/headlamp flasher 104
Lamp flashes:
DSC or DTC is controlling the drive
and braking forces to maintain vehicle
stability 88
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Cockpit
14
Around the center console: controls and displays
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
At a glance
15
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
1 Coupe: glass sunroof, electric with raise
function
*
41
2 Coupe: microphone for hands-free mode
for telephone
*
and voice command
system
*
22
Convertible: microphone on steering
column
3 Reading lamps 105
4 Interior lamps 104
5 Coupe: initiating SOS emergency call 217
6 Indicator lamp
for front passenger
airbags 95
7 Convertible: initiating SOS emergency
call
*
217
8 Control Display 16
9 Hazard warning flashers
10 Central locking system 32
11 Automatic climate control 106
12 Changing
> radio station 157
> track 166
13 Ejecting
> navigation DVD
*
126
> audio CD 166
14 Drive for navigation DVD in Professional
*
navigation system 126
15 Drive for audio CDs 166
16 Entertainment sound output on/off
and adjusting volume 153
18 Bracket for cup holder 115
19 Controller 16
Turn, press or move horizontally in four
directions
20 Activating voice command system
*
22
21 Opening start menu on Control Display 17
22 Dynamic Driving Control 64
Temperature setting,
left/right 106
Automatic air distribution and
volume 107
Cooling function 108
AUC Automatic recirculated-air
control 109
Recirculated-air mode 109
Maximum cooling 109
Residual heat mode 109
Switching off automatic climate
control 109
Air volume 108
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation 108
Rear window defroster 106
17
Heated seats
*
53
PDC Park Distance Control
*
86
DTC Dynamic Traction Control 88
Convertible: opening the convert-
ible top 43
Convertible: closing the convertible
top 43
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
iDrive
16
iDrive
iDrive combines the functions of a multitude of
switches. This allows these functions to be
operated from a central position. The following
section provides an introduction to basic menu
navigation. The control of individual functions is
described in connection with the relevant
equipment.
Controls
1 Control Display
2 button
Opening the start menu
3 Controller
You can use the controller to select menu
items and change settings by:
> moving in four directions, arrows 4
> turning, arrow 5
> pressing, arrow 6
To avoid becoming distracted and unnec-
essarily endangering both your own vehi-
cle's occupants and other road users, never
attempt to use the controls or make entries
unless traffic and road conditions allow.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
At a glance
17
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Menu overview
Communication
> Telephone
*
> BMW Assist
*
or TeleService
*
Navigation or onboard information
> Navigation system
*
> Onboard info, e.g. for displaying of the
average fuel consumption
Entertainment
> Radio
> CD player and CD changer
*
Climate
> Vent settings
> Automatic programs
> Parked car operation
menu
> Switching off the Control Display
> Tone and display settings
> Settings for your vehicle, e.g. for the central
locking system
> Display of maintenance intervals and dead-
lines for legally mandated inspections
> Settings for the telephone
Basic operation
From radio readiness, refer to page 59, the fol-
lowing message is shown on the Control Dis-
play:
To hide the message:
Press the controller.
This displays the start menu.
The message is automatically hidden after
approx. 10 seconds.
Start menu
You can call up all the functions of iDrive using
five menu items.
Opening start menu
Press the button.
To open the start menu from the menu:
Press the button twice.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
iDrive
18
Opening menu items of start menu
From the start menu, you can call up the four
menu items Communication, Navigation, Enter-
tainment, and Climate by moving the controller
left, right, forward, or back.
You can open the menu by pressing the con-
troller.
Comfort opening of menu items
Comfort opening offers you the option of:
> Opening a menu item of the start menu in
the view last selected
> Direct changing between Communication,
Navigation, Entertainment and Climate
without pressing the button
To do so, move the controller in the corre-
sponding direction and hold it for longer than
approx. 2 seconds.
Displays in menu
1 Each menu is divided into fields. The cur-
rently selected field appears brighter.
2 A symbol indicates the last selected menu
item of the start menu:
1 Menu items are usually grouped in horizon-
tal or vertical lists.
2 Arrows indicate the possibility of accessing
other menu items that are not currently vis-
ible.
3 Settings are displayed graphically or
numerically.
Communication
Navigation or onboard info
Entertainment
Climate
menu
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
At a glance
19
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Operating principle at a glance
Basic operation via iDrive is described in this
view.
You can view the individual steps under Set-
tings on Control Display, Setting time, refer to
page 83.
1 Selecting menu item:
> Turn controller; marking moves
> Menu items shown in white can be
selected by marking
2 Activating a menu item:
> Press controller
> New menu items are displayed or
function is carried out
3 Selecting a menu item: refer to 1
4 Changing between fields:
> Briefly move controller left, right, forward
or back
> Release controller
> Active field appears lighter
5 Adjusting settings:
> Turn controller
> Graphic display, numerical value or text
displays can be changed
> Confirmation by changing field
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
iDrive
20
Status information
1 Display for:
> Entertainment:
Radio, CD
> Telephone
*
in "Communication":
Name of linked mobile phone, network
search or no network
> "BMW Assist"
*
:
Existing voice connection with a service
from BMW Assist
2 Entertainment sound output off
3 Station that transmits traffic information is
received
*
:
"TI":
Traffic information for the navigation sys-
tem
can be received and transmission is
switched on
4 Display for:
> New entries present in "Missed calls"
*
> Roaming active
5 Telephoning
*
is possible if the mobile
phone is paired in the vehicle
Mobile phone network reception
strength, dependent on mobile phone
6 Time
Other displays:
When Check Control information appears or
entries are made via the voice command sys-
tem
*
, the status information is temporarily hid-
den.
Assistance window*
Additional information appears in the assis-
tance window:
> the computer or the trip computer
> the arrow or map view with navigation sys-
tem
*
> the current position
Selecting display
1. Move the controller to the right to change to
the assistance window and press the con-
troller.
2. Select a menu item.
3. Press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
At a glance
21
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Switching assistance window on/off
1. Move the controller to the right to change to
the assistance window and press the con-
troller.
2. Select "Assist. window off" and press the
controller.
To switch on, change to the assistance window
and press the controller.
Switching Control Display on/
off
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Display off" and press the control-
ler.
To switch on, press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Voice command system
22
Voice command system
The concept
The voice command system allows you to con-
trol operation of various vehicle systems with-
out ever removing your hands from the steering
wheel.
Individual menu items on the Control Display
can be spoken as commands. This frees you of
having to use the controller.
The voice command system transforms your
spoken commands into control signals for the
selected systems and provides support in the
form of instructions or questions.
The voice command system includes a special
microphone.
The microphone is located:
> Near the interior rearview mirror in the
Coupe, refer to page 14
> On the steering column in the Convertible
Prerequisite
In order to enable identification of the com-
mands to be spoken, use iDrive to set the lan-
guage for the voice command system. Setting
iDrive language, refer to page 85.
Symbols in Owner's Manual
Voice commands
Activating voice command system
1. Press the button.
This symbol on the Control Display and
an acoustic signal tell you that the voice
command system can respond to com-
mands.
2. Say the command.
The command is displayed on the Control
Display.
This symbol is shown on the Control Display
when you can input additional commands.
*
{...} Say the specified commands word for
word.
{{...}} Indicates the responses of the voice
command system.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
At a glance
23
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
If no other commands are possible, then oper-
ate the equipment using iDrive.
Terminating or canceling voice
command
Press the button on the steering wheel or in
the center console
or
Commands
Having possible commands read aloud
You can have the system read aloud the possi-
ble commands related to the selected menu
item on the Control Display.
To have the system list the possible com-
mands:
For example, if you have selected "CD", the
system will read aloud the possible commands
for operating the CD player and the CD
changer
*
.
Opening help
Using alternative commands
There are often several commands for running
a function, e.g.:
Running functions directly with short
commands
With short commands you can run certain func-
tions directly, regardless of which menu item is
selected, refer to page 227.
Opening start menu
An example: selecting a track
1. Switch on Entertainment sound output if
necessary.
2. Press the button on the steering wheel
or in the center console.
4. Press the button on the steering wheel
or in the center console.
{Cancel}
{Options}
{Help}
{Radio on} or {Turn radio on}
{Main menu}
3. {Entertainment}
The system says:
{{Entertainment}}
{CD}
The system says:
{{CD on}}
5. Select a track, e.g.:
{Track 1}
The system says:
{{Track 1}}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Voice command system
24
Notes
The mobile phone can also be operated
with voice commands, refer to
page 185.<
For voice commands, bear the following in
mind:
> Say the commands and numbers smoothly
and at normal volume, avoiding excessive
emphasis and pauses. This also applies to
spelling when entering the destination.
> Always issue commands in the language of
the voice command system.
> When selecting a radio station, use the
usual pronunciation of the station name.
> For entries in the voice-activated phone
book, only use names in the language of the
voice command system and no abbrevia-
tions.
> Keep the doors, windows and glass sun-
roof
*
or convertible top closed to prevent
interference from ambient noise.
> Avoid background noises in the vehicle
while speaking.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
This chapter is intended to provide you with
information for complete control of your vehicle.
Its extensive array of features and accessories,
both for driving and for your own safety,
comfort and convenience, are described here.
Controls
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Opening and closing
28
Opening and closing
Keys/remote control
1 Remote control with integrated key
2 Spare key
3 Adapter for spare key, in glove compart-
ment
Remote control with integrated key
Each remote control contains a battery which is
automatically charged in the ignition lock while
driving. Drive a longer distance with each
remote control at least twice a year to keep the
battery charged. For comfort access
*
, the
remote control contains a replaceable battery,
refer to page 38.
Depending on which remote control is detected
by the vehicle during unlocking, different set-
tings are called up and carried out in the vehicle,
refer to Personal Profile, page 29.
Information on the required maintenance is also
stored in the remote control, refer to Service
data in remote control, page 210.
Integrated key
Press button 1 to unlock the key.
The integrated key fits the following locks:
> Hotel function, refer to page 33
> Driver's door, refer to page 32
> Luggage compartment lid, refer to page 34
New remote controls
To obtain additional or replace lost keys, new
remote controls with an integrated key are
available at your BMW center.
Spare key
Store the spare key in a safe place such as your
wallet. This key is not intended for regular use.
The spare key and integrated key of the remote
control fit the same locks.
Adapter for spare key
The adapter is required so that the vehicle can
be started with the spare key or radio readiness
can be switched on.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
29
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Remove the adapter from the holder in the
glove compartment and slide the spare key into
the adapter before use.
Personal Profile
The concept
You can set a number of functions of your BMW
individually according to your preferences. Per-
sonal Profile ensures that most of these set-
tings are stored for the remote control currently
in use without you having to do anything. When
the vehicle is unlocked, the corresponding
remote control is detected and the settings
stored for it are called up and carried out.
This means that you will always find your BMW
set to your own personal settings even if
another person with his/her own remote control
and settings has used the vehicle since the last
time you drove it. The individual settings are
stored for a maximum of four remote controls.
Personal Profile settings
Details on the settings are provided on the
specified pages.
> When unlocking with the remote control,
either unlock only the driver's door or
unlock the entire vehicle, refer to page 30
> Locking the vehicle after a short time or
after starting to drive, refer to page 33
> Programming buttons on steering wheel,
refer to page 55
> Settings for the display on the Control Dis-
play:
> Brightness of the Control Display, refer
to page 84
> Units of measure for consumption,
route/distances, temperature and pres-
sure, refer to page 85
> Language on the Control Display, refer
to page 85
> 12h/24h clock mode, refer to page 84
> Date format, refer to page 84
> Lighting settings:
> Pathway lighting, refer to page 102
> Daytime running lamps
*
, refer to
page 103
> Triple turn signal activation, refer to
page 65
> Showing optical warning for PDC Park Dis-
tance Control
*
, refer to page 87
> Selection and brightness of the display for
the Head-Up Display
*
, refer to page 98
> Display settings of BMW Night Vision
*
,
refer to page 100
> Air distribution, temperature in the upper
body region, and intensity for the automatic
climate control, refer to page 107
> Adjusting the voice instructions for the des-
tination guidance of the navigation sys-
tem
*
, refer to Starting navigation system on
page 126
The most recent settings for the following are
also called up during unlocking:
> Driver's seat, exterior-mirror and steering-
wheel position, refer to page 50
> Audio sources, setting volume and tone,
refer to page 153
> Radio, displaying stored stations, refer to
page 156
> Telephone, setting volume, refer to
page 180
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Opening and closing
30
Central locking system
The concept
The central locking system is ready for opera-
tion whenever the driver's door is closed.
The system either locks or unlocks all of the fol-
lowing:
> Doors
> Compartment in the front center console
> Luggage compartment lid
> Fuel filler door
Operating from outside
> via the remote control
> via the door lock
> with comfort access
*
via the door handles
These actions operate the anti-theft system at
the same time. It prevents the doors from being
unlocked using the lock buttons or door han-
dles. The interior lamps and the courtesy
lamps
*
are also switched on and off with the
remote control. The alarm system
is armed/dis-
armed at the same time.
You can find more detailed information on the
alarm system
on page 35.
Operating from inside
Via the central locking button, refer to page 32.
The fuel filler door
and the compartment in the
front center console are not locked, refer to
page 32.
In the event of a serious accident, the central
locking system unlocks automatically. The haz-
ard warning flashers and interior lamps are also
switched on.
Opening and closing:
from outside
Using remote control
Persons or animals left unattended in a
parked vehicle can lock the doors from
the inside. Always take along the remote control
when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can
then be opened from the outside.<
Unlocking
Press the button.
You can set how the vehicle is unlocked. The
setting is stored for the remote control currently
in use.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Door locks" is selected and
press the controller.
6. Select "Central locking" and press the con-
troller.
7. Select "Unlock button" and press the con-
troller.
8. Select a menu item:
> "All doors"
Press the button once to unlock the
entire vehicle.
> "Driver's door only"
*
Press the button once to unlock only
the driver's door and the fuel filler door.
Press the button twice to unlock the
entire vehicle.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
31
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
9. Press the controller.
Comfort opening mode
Press the button longer:
> Coupe: the windows are opened, the glass
sunroof
*
is raised and the sliding visor
slides back.
> Convertible: the windows and the convert-
ible top are opened.
Watch the convertible top during the
opening process to be sure that no
one is injured. Releasing the button stops
the operation.<
Locking doors
Press the button.
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if
persons are inside, as unlocking from the
inside is not possible without special knowl-
edge.<
Switching on interior lamps
With vehicle locked:
Press the button.
You can also use this function to locate your
vehicle in parking garages etc.
Panic mode*
You can trigger the alarm system in case of dan-
ger:
Press the button for at least 3 seconds.
To switch off alarm: press any button.
Opening luggage compartment lid
Press the button for approx. 1 second.
The luggage compartment lid opens, regard-
less of whether it was previously locked or
unlocked.
A previously locked luggage compart-
ment lid is also locked again after closing.
Coupe: during opening, the luggage compart-
ment lid pivots back and up. Make sure there is
sufficient clearance.<
Setting confirmation signals
You can vary or deactivate the confirmation sig-
nals for locking or unlocking.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Door locks" is selected and
press the controller.
6. Select "Confirmation" and press the con-
troller.
7. Select the desired signal.
8. Press the controller.
The signal is activated.
Malfunction
The remote control may malfunction due to
local radio waves. Should the remote control fail
to operate due to interference of this kind,
unlock and lock the vehicle via the door lock
using a key.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Opening and closing
32
If it is no longer possible to lock the vehicle
using the remote control, then the battery is
discharged. Use this remote control during an
extended drive; this will recharge the battery,
refer to page 28.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is gov-
erned by the following:
FCC ID:
LX8766S
LX8766E
LX8CAS
LX8CAS2
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
> This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
> this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or
changes to these devices could void the
user's authority to operate this equipment.<
Using door lock
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if
persons are inside, as unlocking from the
inside is not possible without special knowl-
edge.<
When unlocking
1. Turning the key once unlocks the driver's
door and the fuel filler door.
2. A second turn of the key unlocks the pas-
senger door and luggage compartment lid.
Comfort operation
You can use the door lock to operate the win-
dows and the glass sunroof
*
in the Coupe or to
operate the windows and the top in the Con-
vertible.
Turn and hold the key in the positions for
unlocking or locking.
Keep a close eye on the closing process
and also on the opening process of the
convertible top to be sure that no one is injured.
Releasing the key stops the operation.<
Manual operation
In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can
turn a key all the way to the right or left in the
door lock to lock or unlock the driver's door.
Opening and closing:
from inside
This button serves to unlock or lock doors and
the luggage compartment lid, but does not acti-
vate the anti-theft system. The fuel filler door
remains unlocked.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
33
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Automatic locking
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Door locks" is selected and
press the controller.
6. Select "Central locking" and press the con-
troller.
7. Select a menu item:
> "Relock door if not opened"
The central locking system automati-
cally locks the vehicle after a short time
when no door has been opened.
> "Lock after driving"
The central locking system automati-
cally locks the vehicle as soon as you
start to drive.
8. Press the controller.
The setting is selected.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Unlocking and opening doors
> Either unlock both doors at the same time
with the button for the central locking sys-
tem and then pull the door handle above the
armrest or
> pull the door handle for each door twice: the
first pull unlocks the door, and the second
one opens it.
Locking doors
> Use the central locking button to lock both
of the doors simultaneously, or
> press down the lock button of a door.
To prevent you from being locked out, the
open driver's door cannot be locked using
the lock button.
Persons or animals left unattended in a
parked vehicle can lock the doors from
the inside. Always take along the remote control
when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can
then be opened from the outside.<
Hotel function
The hotel function locks the compartment in
the front center console and the luggage com-
partment lid separately and disconnects them
from the central locking system. If you hand
over the remote control without the integrated
key, refer to page 28, e.g. at a hotel, then this
prevents access to the luggage compartment
and to the compartment in the front center con-
sole.
Turn the key to the right, refer to illustration,
until the key slot points in the direction of travel
and then remove:
The hotel function is activated after subsequent
locking or unlocking of the vehicle. The system
locks the luggage compartment lid and the
compartment in the front center console and
disconnects them from the central locking sys-
tem.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Opening and closing
34
Unlocking manually
In order to manually unlock the compartment in
the front center console in the event of an elec-
trical malfunction, turn the key all the way to the
right until it reaches the stop.
If unlocking was manual, return the lock to
the home position, i.e. all the way back to
the left, before reactivating the hotel function.<
Doors
Automatic soft closing*
To close the doors, merely press it closed gen-
tly. The closing process will then be carried out
automatically.
Make sure that the closing path of the
doors is clear; otherwise injuries may
result.<
Luggage compartment lid
During opening, the luggage compart-
ment lid pivots back and up. Make sure
there is sufficient clearance.<
Opening from inside
Press the button:
The luggage compartment lid opens, provided
that it is not locked or the hotel function is not
activated, refer to the above section.
Opening from outside
Press the upper half of the BMW emblem or
press the button on the remote control for
approx. 1 second: the luggage compartment lid
opens.
Convertible: if the convertible top is not
completely open or closed, then the lug-
gage compartment lid cannot be opened, refer
to page 43.<
Unlocking manually
The luggage compartment lid lock is located
under the BMW emblem. All keys, refer to
page 28, fit the luggage compartment lid lock.
Turn the key toward the right up to the stop: the
luggage compartment lid opens.
If you use the lock to open the luggage
compartment lid while the alarm system
is armed, the alarm will be triggered. To prevent
this, you should deactivate the alarm before-
hand.
If the alarm has been triggered accidentally,
switch off the alarm, refer to page 36.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
35
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Closing
Make sure that the closing path of the
luggage compartment lid is clear; other-
wise, injuries may result.<
The handle recesses on the interior trim of the
luggage compartment lid make it easier to pull
down.
Emergency release
Pull the lever in the luggage compartment. The
luggage compartment lid is unlocked.
Luggage compartment
There are four lashing eyes on the inner corners
of the luggage compartment for securing lug-
gage nets
*
or securing straps to fix luggage in
position.
Also refer to Securing cargo, page 123.
Convertible: increasing luggage
compartment capacity
With the convertible top closed, you can
increase the luggage compartment capacity:
To do so, unfold the handle and press it down-
ward in the direction of travel, refer to arrow.
This moves the convertible top compartment
floor into the raised position.
Before opening the convertible top, carry out
this procedure in reverse order.
The convertible top cannot be opened if
the convertible top compartment floor is
in the raised position.<
Alarm system
The concept
The vehicle alarm system responds:
> To the opening of a door, the hood, or the
luggage compartment lid
> To movements in the vehicle interior: inte-
rior motion sensor, refer to page 36
> To changes in the vehicle's tilt if someone
attempts to steal the wheels or tow the
vehicle
> To interruptions in battery voltage
Unauthorized operations are briefly signaled by
the alarm system:
> by triggering an acoustic alarm
> by switching on
the hazard warning flashers
> by flashing the high beams
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Opening and closing
36
Arming and disarming alarm system
When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with
the remote control or at the door lock, the alarm
system is armed or disarmed at the same time.
You can open the luggage compartment lid,
even with the system armed, by using the
button of the remote control, refer to page 31.
When the luggage compartment lid is closed,
it is once again locked and monitored.
Switching off alarm
> Unlock the vehicle using the remote control,
refer to page 30, or
> insert the remote control all the way into the
ignition lock.
Indicator lamp displays
> The indicator lamp below the interior rear-
view mirror flashes continuously: the sys-
tem is armed.
> The indicator lamp flashes after locking: the
doors, hood or luggage compartment lid are
not properly closed. Even if you do not close
the alerted area, the system begins to mon-
itor the remaining areas, and the indicator
lamp flashes continuously after approx.
10 seconds. However, the interior motion
sensor is not activated.
> After the vehicle is unlocked, the indicator
lamp goes out: no manipulation or
attempted intrusions have been detected in
the period since the system was armed.
> The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking
until the remote control is inserted into the
ignition lock, however for a maximum of
approx. 5 minutes: an attempted entry has
been detected in the period since the sys-
tem was armed.
Tilt alarm sensor
Monitors the inclination of the vehicle. The
alarm system reacts, for example, if someone
attempts to steal the wheels or tow the vehicle.
Interior motion sensor
Coupe:
In order for the interior motion sensor to func-
tion properly, the windows and glass sunroof
*
must be completely closed.
Convertible:
Monitors the interior up to the height of the seat
cushions. This means that the alarm system,
including the interior motion sensor, is armed
even if the convertible top is open. Falling
objects, e.g. leaves, can trigger false alarms,
refer to Avoiding unintentional alarms.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
may be switched off at the same time.
This prevents unintentional alarms, e.g. in the
following situations:
> In two-level garages
> When transporting on car-carrying trains,
by sea or on a trailer
> When animals are to remain in the vehicle
Switching off tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
Press the button on the remote control
again as soon as the vehicle is locked.
The indicator lamp lights up briefly and then
flashes continuously. The tilt alarm sensor and
the interior motion sensor are switched off until
the vehicle is unlocked and locked again.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
37
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Comfort access*
Comfort access enables you to access your
vehicle without having to hold the remote con-
trol in your hand. It is sufficient to carry the
remote control with you, e.g. in your jacket
pocket. The vehicle automatically detects the
related remote control in the immediate vicinity
or in the interior.
Comfort access supports the following func-
tions:
> Unlocking/locking vehicle
> Comfort closing with Coupe
> Opening luggage compartment lid sepa-
rately
> Starting engine
Functional requirement
> The vehicle or the luggage compartment lid
can only be locked if the vehicle detects that
the remote control you are carrying is out-
side the vehicle.
> The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
> The engine can only be started if the vehicle
detects that the remote control is located in
the vehicle.
Comparison with ordinary remote
control
You can control the functions mentioned previ-
ously with the comfort access or by pressing
the buttons on the remote control. Before doing
so, please familiarize yourself with the informa-
tion on opening and closing, starting on
page 28.
The special features when using comfort
access are described below.
Should a short delay occur when opening
or closing the windows, the glass sunroof
or the convertible top, the system is checking
whether a remote control is located in the vehi-
cle. Please repeat opening or closing if neces-
sary.<
Unlocking
Completely grasp a door handle, arrow 1.
This corresponds to pressing the button.
Locking doors
> For the driver's door, touch the area high-
lighted in the picture, arrow 2, with your fin-
ger for approx. 1 second.
> For the passenger's door, touch the area
highlighted in the picture, arrow 3, with your
finger for approx. 1 second.
This corresponds to pressing the but-
ton.
Please make sure that the ignition and all
electronic systems/consumers are
switched off before locking to save the bat-
tery.<
Coupe: comfort closing
Hold a finger or the back of the hand on the sur-
face, arrow 2 or 3.
The windows, the glass sunroof
*
and the slid-
ing visor are closed.
Watch during the closing process to be
sure that no one is injured. Removing the
hand from the door handle stops the closing
process immediately.<
Convertible: window and convertible
top operation
From radio readiness switched on, the windows
can be opened and closed, and with the vehicle
stopped the convertible top, when a remote
control is located in the interior of the vehicle.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Opening and closing
38
Opening luggage compartment lid
separately
Press the upper half of the BMW emblem.
This corresponds to pressing the button.
If a remote control accidentally left in the
luggage compartment is detected inside
the locked vehicle after the luggage compart-
ment lid has been closed, then the luggage
compartment lid opens again. The hazard warn-
ing flashers flash and a signal
*
sounds.<
Switching on radio readiness
By briefly pressing the Start/Stop button, you
switch on the radio readiness, refer to page 59.
When doing so, do not depress the brake
or clutch pedal, otherwise the engine will
start immediately.<
Starting engine
You can start the engine or switch on the igni-
tion if a remote control is located in the interior
of the vehicle. It need not be inserted in the igni-
tion lock, refer to page 59.
If you take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle with the engine running, a
warning lamp lights up. In addition, a message
appears on the Control Display. As long as no
remote control is detected in the vehicle, it is
only possible to restart the engine within
approx. 10 seconds after it is switched off.
Switching off engine with automatic
transmission
The engine can only be switched off when the
selector lever is in position P, refer to page 61.
To switch the engine off when the selector lever
is in position N, the remote control must be
inserted in the ignition lock.
Before driving into a car wash with
automatic transmission
1. Insert remote control into ignition lock.
2. Depress brake pedal.
3. Place selector lever in position N.
4. Switch off the engine.
The vehicle can roll.
Malfunction
The comfort access function may malfunction
due to local radio waves. If this occurs, then
open or close the vehicle with the buttons on
the remote control or with a key. To start the
engine after this, insert the remote control in the
ignition lock.
Replacing battery
The remote control for comfort access contains
a battery which must be replaced occasionally.
1. Remove integrated key from remote con-
trol, refer to page 28.
2. Remove cover.
3. Insert new battery with positive side facing
upward.
4. Press cover closed.
Return used battery to a recycling collec-
tion point or to your BMW center.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
39
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Windows
To prevent injuries, exercise care when
closing the windows and keep them in
your field of vision until they are shut.
Always take along the remote control when you
leave the vehicle; otherwise, children could, for
example, operate the windows and injure them-
selves.<
Coupe: opening, closing
> Press switch to resistance point:
The window continues to open for as long
as you hold down the switch.
> Press the switch beyond the resistance
point:
The window opens automatically. Pressing
the switch again stops the opening move-
ment.
You can close the windows in the same manner
by pulling the switch.
Convertible: opening, closing
For information on window operation with com-
fort access, also refer to page 37.
To close the side windows while the vehi-
cle is being driven, always close the rear
windows first or all four windows simulta-
neously; otherwise, the windows cannot close
tightly at higher speeds.<
Individually
> Press switch to resistance point:
The window continues to open for as long
as you hold down the switch.
> Press the switch beyond the resistance
point:
The window opens automatically. Pressing
the switch again stops the opening move-
ment.
You can close the windows in the same manner
by pulling the switch. The rear windows cannot
be closed automatically.
Together
1. Briefly press button 1:
The LEDs in button 1 and switch 2 light up
for approx. 10 seconds.
2. Press switch 2:
> Down to the resistance point:
All windows, including the rear window,
continue to open as long as you press
the switch.
You can close the windows in the same
manner by pulling the switch.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Opening and closing
40
> Press the switch beyond the resistance
point:
All windows open automatically. Press-
ing the switch again stops the opening
movement.
Briefly press button 1 again to deactivate the
function. The LEDs go out.
Rear window
1. Briefly press button 1:
The LEDs in button 1 and switch 2 light up
for approx. 10 seconds.
2. Press switch 2:
> Down to the resistance point:
The rear window continues to open for
as long as you hold down the switch.
You can close the rear window in the
same manner by pulling the switch.
> Press the switch beyond the resistance
point:
The rear window opens automatically.
Pressing the switch again stops the
opening movement.
Briefly press button 1 again to deactivate the
function. The LEDs go out.
The rear window opens and closes auto-
matically when you open or close the con-
vertible top.<
For information on using the comfort operation
mode at the door lock or with the remote con-
trol, refer to page 31 or 32.
Coupe: for information on comfort closing with
comfort access, refer to page 37.
After switching off ignition
You can still operate the windows with the
remote control removed or the ignition
switched off for approx. 1 minute, as long as
neither of the doors has been opened.
Pinch protection system
If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a
window closes, the closing action is interrupted
and the window reopens slightly.
Despite the pinch protection system,
inspect the window's travel path prior to
closing it, as the safety system might fail to
detect certain kinds of obstructions, such as
thin objects, and the window would continue
closing.
Do not install any accessories in the range of
movement of the windows, otherwise the pinch
protection system will be impaired.
Convertible: the rear side windows and rear
window are not equipped with a pinch protec-
tion system. Therefore, watch the rear side win-
dows and the rear window during closing, oth-
erwise injuries can occur.<
Closing without pinch protection
system
In case of danger from outside or if, for example,
ice on the window prevents normal closing, pro-
ceed as follows:
1. Pull the switch beyond the resistance point
and hold. The pinch protection system is
limited and the window opens slightly if the
closing force exceeds a certain value.
2. Pull the switch beyond the resistance point
and hold again within approx. 4 seconds.
The window closes without the pinch pro-
tection system.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
41
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Coupe:
Glass sunroof, electric with
raise function*
To prevent injuries, exercise care when
closing the glass sunroof and keep it in
your field of vision until it is shut.
Always take along the remote control when you
leave the vehicle; otherwise, children could, for
example, operate the roof and injure them-
selves.<
Raising and closing glass sunroof
> Briefly press the switch:
The sunroof opens and the sliding visor
moves back approx. 2 in/5 cm
or
press the switch twice beyond the resis-
tance point toward the rear:
The sunroof opens and the sliding visor
moves completely back.
> To close, briefly press the switch or push it
twice beyond the resistance point toward
the front:
The sunroof and sliding visor close.
Opening and closing sliding visor
> Push the switch up to the resistance point in
the desired direction:
The sliding visor continues to move for as
long as you hold the switch.
> Push the switch beyond the resistance
point in the desired direction:
The sliding visor moves automatically.
Briefly press the switch again in any direc-
tion to stop the movement.
For information on using the comfort operation
mode at the door lock or with the remote con-
trol, refer to page 31 or 32.
For information on comfort closing with comfort
access, refer to page 37.
After switching off ignition
You can still operate the sunroof with the
remote control removed or the ignition
switched off for approx. 1 minute, as long as
neither of the doors has been opened.
Pinch protection system
If the glass sunroof encounters resistance when
closing, the closing action is interrupted and the
glass sunroof opens.
If the sliding visor encounters resistance when
closing within the last approx. 8 in/20 cm, the
closing action is interrupted and the sliding
visor opens again slightly.
Despite the pinch protection system, you
should inspect the sunroof's travel range
prior to closing it, as the safety feature might fail
to detect certain kinds of obstructions, such as
very thin objects, and the sunroof would con-
tinue closing.<
Closing without pinch protection
system
In case of danger from outside, slide the switch
forward beyond the resistance point and hold.
The roof closes without the pinch protection
system.
Following interruptions in electrical
power supply
After an interruption in the power supply the
glass sunroof may not move. Then have the
system initialized. Should this occur, please
have the sunroof initialized at your BMW center.
Moving manually
In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can
move the glass sunroof and the sliding visor
manually.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Opening and closing
42
Glass sunroof
1. Remove cover on headliner in front of rear
window. To do so, lift slightly at rear,
arrows 1. Grasp behind the cover, arrows 2
and pull firmly downward.
2. Insert Allen wrench from onboard tool kit,
refer to page 212, into the opening pro-
vided.
3. Use the Allen wrench to move the glass
sunroof in the desired direction.
Sliding visor
1. Fold the cover downward, if necessary
using the screwdriver from the onboard tool
kit, refer to page 212.
2. Insert the Allen wrench supplied with the
onboard tool kit into the opening provided.
3. Use the Allen wrench to move the sliding
visor in the desired direction.
Convertible: top
The fully automatic convertible top combines
secure weather protection with simple and con-
venient operation.
Here are a few tips for getting the maximum
pleasure from your Convertible:
> It is advisable to close the convertible top
when the vehicle is parked. The closed con-
vertible top not only protects the passenger
compartment from unforeseen weather
damage, it also provides a certain amount of
protection from theft. Nonetheless, even if
the convertible top is closed, only keep
valuables in the locked luggage compart-
ment.
> Do not attach luggage rack systems to the
convertible top.
In order to avoid damage, do not move the
convertible top at temperatures below
+147/–106.
Do not leave the convertible top in its storage
compartment for longer than one day when wet;
otherwise, damage from moisture can occur.
Do not place any objects on the convertible top;
otherwise, if the top were to be operated, these
objects could fall off and lead to damage or
injury.
Never move the convertible top when the roll-
over protection system is raised.
Driving without having completed the opening
or closing action can lead to damage or injury.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
43
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Do not place hands in the top mechanism dur-
ing the opening and closing action. Keep chil-
dren away from the travel path of the convert-
ible top.
For safety reasons, do not move the convertible
top unless the vehicle is stationary.<
If you have initiated top movement with
the vehicle at a stop and then start to
drive, e.g. at a traffic light, you can continue the
initiated operation up to a speed of 20 mph/
30 km/h:
To do so, press and hold the corresponding
button.<
Partial vacuums that occur at higher
speeds in the passenger compartment
can make the convertible top flap. Use the auto-
matic climate control to increase the air volume
so that a partial vacuum in the vehicle does not
occur.<
Prior to opening and closing
> Read the safety precautions above carefully
and comply with them fully.
> Ensure that the convertible top compart-
ment floor in the luggage compartment is
folded down, refer to page 35, as otherwise
the convertible top cannot be opened.
> Make sure that the luggage compartment
lid is closed.
Opening and closing
For information on top operation with comfort
access, also refer to page 37.
From radio readiness, refer to page 59, with the
vehicle stationary:
To avoid putting excessive strain on the
battery, only move the convertible top
when the engine is running if possible.
Before closing the convertible top, remove for-
eign objects from the windshield frame, as
these might inhibit closing of the convertible
top.<
1 Closing
2 LED
3 Opening
When the button for operating the con-
vertible top is pressed, the side windows
move downward slightly and the rear window is
lowered completely.
If you hold down the button after the LED 2
goes out, then the windows travel upward
again.
If the convertible top is not completely open or
closed, then the luggage compartment lid can-
not be opened.<
LED
In the following situations, in addition to the
LED, a message is displayed on the Control
Display and an acoustic signal may sound:
> During convertible top operation, the LED
lights up green. It goes out as soon as the
opening or closing action is finished.
> If the LED flashes red when you release the
button, the opening or closing action has
not yet finished.
> If the LED lights up red when the button is
pressed, either the convertible top com-
partment floor in the luggage compartment
is in the raised position or a malfunction has
occurred. The convertible top cannot be
moved.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Opening and closing
44
Interruption
The automatic sequence of movements is
interrupted if the button for top operation is
released. The sequence can be continued in
the desired direction by pressing the appropri-
ate button.
If the opening or closing action is interrupted for
a longer period, the convertible top remains in
that position for approx. 15 minutes before it
slowly moves to a stable position.
A convertible top which is not completely
opened or closed presents a danger.
Do not interrupt and continue the closing action
several times in succession; otherwise, the top
mechanism can be damaged.<
If the convertible top is not completely
open or closed, then the luggage com-
partment lid cannot be opened.<
Comfort operation with remote control
and via door lock
Refer to pages 31 and 32.
Closing manually
Only close the convertible top manually if
absolutely necessary; never open it man-
ually. The convertible top compartment lid can-
not be locked in the event of an electrical mal-
function and would open while the vehicle is
being driven.
Improper handling can lead to damage.<
Before closing
1. Open luggage compartment lid.
2. Take the Allen wrench and the screwdriver
from the onboard tool kit, refer to page 212.
3. Pry out the two buttons in the luggage com-
partment with the screwdriver and then pull
firmly. This unlocks the convertible top
compartment lid.
4. Close luggage compartment lid.
During manual convertible top opera-
tion, the luggage compartment lid
cannot be opened.<
5. Completely open the side windows and the
rear window.
If the rear window cannot be opened using
the switch, it must be lowered manually.
Opening rear window manually
1. Pry out the cover between the rear head
restraints. To do so, place the screwdriver
as close as possible to the locking ele-
ments, as shown in the illustration.
2. Insert the Allen wrench as far as possible
into the opening and turn firmly in the direc-
tion indicated by the arrow until the rear
window is completely open.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
45
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Closing
Perform the following work steps with the
assistance of a second person and with
the doors open, otherwise injury and damage to
the convertible top can occur.<
1. Push the cover 1 on the left and right of the
side panel forward. Reach into the resulting
openings and raise the convertible top
compartment lid 2 as far as it will go.
2. Grasp the top with both hands at the left and
right side frame, arrow 3.
Only lift out the top by the side frame,
otherwise the top may be damaged.<
3. Together with the other person, pull the two
sides of the convertible top out simulta-
neously and pivot forward. When doing so,
keep the convertible top compartment lid
open, arrow 4, e.g. with your shoulder.
Do not carry out the next operation,
raising top ends, until the top has
been swung forward, otherwise damage
can occur.<
4. Raise the two convertible top ends as far as
possible, arrow 5, and close the convertible
top compartment lid, arrow 6.
5. Fold the top ends down onto the convert-
ible top compartment lid.
6. From the interior, take out the cover in the
center of the front top frame; use a screw-
driver if necessary.
7. Insert the Allen wrench into the opening
provided.
8. From the outside, both persons pull the
front frame of the convertible top down-
ward, as simultaneously as possible on the
two sides.
9. Turn the Allen wrench in the direction of the
arrow until the front convertible top frame is
locked to the windshield frame.
The rear convertible top ends are automati-
cally pressed onto the convertible top com-
partment lid and close tightly with tension.
10. If necessary, close the rear window again
manually in the same way as above.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Opening and closing
46
Wind deflector*
The wind deflector keeps the air movement in
the passenger compartment to a minimum
when the convertible top is open, thus enabling
pleasant driving even at higher speeds.
The wind deflector is stowed in a protective
sleeve in the luggage compartment. Short
instructions for use are also provided on the
protective sleeve.
Before installing
1. Remove the wind deflector from the protec-
tive sleeve and fold it open, refer to
arrows 1.
2. Press the upper and lower section together
until the locking device engages, refer to
arrow 2.
3. Push the securing pin 3 out until it engages.
4. Unfold the rear mounts 4.
Installing
1. Insert the securing pin 1 of the wind deflec-
tor into the appropriate opening on the right
side of the vehicle.
2. Guide the rear mounts 2 into the recepta-
cles provided.
3. Push the securing pin 3 on the left side into
the appropriate opening until it snaps into
place.
4. Fold up the upper half 4 of the wind deflec-
tor.
With wind deflector fitted: do not incline
the front seat backrests too far backward
if the seat is to be moved back to the end posi-
tion. Otherwise, the wind deflector will be dam-
aged.<
Removing
The same as installing, but in reverse order.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
47
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Folding up
1. Push the handle of the securing pin on the
wind deflector on the left side of the vehicle
all the way back and release the locking
mechanism.
2. Fold in the upper and lower section.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Adjusting
48
Adjusting
Sitting safely
The ideal sitting position can make a vital con-
tribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. In the
interaction with the safety belts, the head
restraints and the airbags, the seat position
plays an important role in an accident. To
ensure that the safety systems operate with
optimal efficiency, we strongly urge you to fol-
low the instructions contained in the following
section.
For additional information on Transporting chil-
dren safely, refer to page 57.
Airbags
Always maintain an adequate distance
between yourself and the airbags. Always
hold the steering wheel by its rim with hands at
the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions to mini-
mize the risk of injuries to your hands and arms
in the event of airbag deployment.
No one and nothing is to come between the air-
bags and the seat occupant.
Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the
front passenger side as a storage area. Make
sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly
and does not rest feet or legs on the instrument
panel, otherwise leg injuries can occur if the
knee and front airbags are triggered.
Make sure that occupants do not rest their head
on the side or head airbags; otherwise, injuries
can occur if the airbags are triggered.<
Even if you adhere to all the instructions, inju-
ries resulting from contact with airbags cannot
be fully excluded, depending on the circum-
stances. The ignition and inflation noise may
provoke a mild hearing loss in extremely sensi-
tive individuals. This effect is usually only tem-
porary.
For airbag locations and additional information
on airbags, refer to page 94.
Head restraints
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in an accident.
Adjust the head restraint so that its center
is approx. at ear level. Otherwise, there is
increased danger of injury in the event of an
accident.<
Head restraints, refer to page 51.
Safety belt
Before every drive, make sure that safety belts
are being worn at all of the occupied seats. Air-
bags complement the safety belt as an addi-
tional safety device, but they do not represent a
substitute.
Your vehicle has four seats that are each
equipped with a safety belt.
Never allow more than one person to
wear a single safety belt. Never allow
infants or small children to ride in a passenger's
lap. Make sure that the belt lies low around the
hips in the lap area and does not press on the
abdomen. The safety belt may not lie across the
neck, rub on sharp edges, be routed over solid
or breakable objects or be pinched. Wear the
safety belt without twisting, snugly across the
lap and shoulders, as close to the body as pos-
sible. Otherwise, the belt can slip over the hips
in the lap area in a frontal impact and injure the
abdomen. Avoid wearing clothing that prevents
the belt from fitting properly and pull the shoul-
der belt upward periodically to readjust the ten-
sion across your lap in order to avoid a reduc-
tion in the restraining effect of the safety belt.<
Safety belts refer to page 53.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
49
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Seats
Note before adjusting
Never attempt to adjust your seat while
operating the vehicle. The seat could
respond with unexpected movement and the
ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
On the front passenger side as well, do not tilt
the backrest too far toward the rear. Failure to
observe this precaution can prevent the belt
from providing effective protection against
injury, as the passenger could slide under the
belt in an accident.<
Also follow the instructions regarding damage
to the safety belt on page 53.
Convertible: with the wind deflector fitted,
do not incline the front seat backrests too
far backward if the seat is to be moved back to
the end position. Otherwise, the wind deflector
will be damaged.<
Adjusting seat
To ensure that the safety systems con-
tinue to provide optimized protection,
please follow the adjustment instructions on
page 48.<
1 Inclination
2 Longitudinal direction
3 Height
4 Backrest
5 Convertible: head restraints, refer to
page 52
With the sports seat
*
, you can also adjust the
thigh support manually:
Pull the lever and adjust the thigh support in the
longitudinal direction.
Lumbar support*
You can also adjust the contours of the backrest
to obtain additional support in the lumbar
region.
The upper hips and spinal column receive sup-
plementary support to help you maintain a
relaxed, upright sitting position.
> Increase or decrease curvature:
Press front or rear of switch.
> Move curvature up or down:
Press top or bottom of switch.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Adjusting
50
Seat, mirror and steering
wheel memory
You can store and select three different adjust-
ment settings for the driver's seat, exterior mir-
rors and steering wheel.
The adjustment of the lumbar support is not
stored in the memory.
Storing
1. Switch on radio readiness or ignition, refer
to page 59.
2. Adjust the desired seat, exterior mirror and
steering-wheel positions.
3. Press the button:
The LED in the button lights up.
4. Press the desired memory button 1, 2 or 3:
The LED goes out.
Requesting
Do not request a position from the mem-
ory while the vehicle is moving. There is a
risk of accident from unexpected movement of
the seat or steering wheel.<
Comfort mode
1. Open the driver's door after unlocking or
switch on radio readiness, refer to page 59.
2. Briefly press the desired memory button 1,
2 or 3.
The system cancels the adjustment procedure
when you briefly press one of the seat adjust-
ment switches or one of the memory buttons.
The adjusting procedure for the steering wheel
is interrupted if you briefly press the switch for
the steering wheel adjustment in any direction,
refer to page 55.
Safety feature
1. Close the driver's door and switch ignition
on or off, refer to page 59.
2. Press the desired memory button 1, 2 or 3
and maintain pressure until the adjustment
process has been completed.
If the button was pressed inadvertently:
press the button again; the LED goes out.
Activating with remote control
The last positions of the driver's seat, external
rearview mirrors, and steering wheel are stored
for the remote key currently in use.
You can choose when the position is requested:
> Request when unlocking vehicle
> Request when opening driver's door
When using this feature, always make
sure that the footwell behind the driver's
seat is empty and unobstructed. If you fail to do
so, any persons or objects behind the seat
could be injured or damaged by a rearward
movement of the seat.<
The system cancels the adjustment procedure
when you briefly press one of the seat adjust-
ment switches or one of the memory buttons.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Door locks" is selected and
press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
51
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
6. Select "Central locking" and press the con-
troller.
7. Select "Last seat pos." and press the con-
troller.
8. Select "After unlocking" or "After door
opened".
9. Press the controller.
To cancel the request:
Select "Deactivated" and press the controller.
Front head restraints
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in an accident.
Adjust the head restraint so that its center
is approx. at ear level. Otherwise, there is
increased danger of injury in the event of an
accident. Only remove the head restraints if no
one will be sitting on the seat in question. Rein-
stall the head restraints before transporting
passengers, as otherwise the head restraint
cannot provide its protective function.<
Coupe
Adjusting height
> To raise: pull the head restraint upward.
> To lower: slide the head restraint down-
ward.
To reach the lowest position, press the
button, refer to arrow 1.<
Adjusting tilt angle
Swivel the head restraints.
Removing
1. Pull the head restraint upward to the stop.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and remove the
head restraint.
Only remove the head restraints if no one
will be sitting on the seat in question.
Reinstall head restraint before passengers use
the respective seat.<
Installing
Insert head restraint into the sockets and
adjust.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Adjusting
52
Convertible
Adjusting height
> To raise: move the switch upward.
> To lower: move the switch downward.
Adjusting tilt angle
Swivel the head restraints.
Entering rear
Before starting to drive, fold backrests
back, otherwise there is the danger of
accident due to an unexpected movement of
the seat.<
Coupe: releasing backrest
Pull the lever upward and fold the backrest for-
ward.
The lever is designed so that the safety belt can
be hooked onto it. This enables you to fasten
the safety belt more conveniently.
Convertible: releasing backrest
The belt system integrated in the seat makes it
easier to get in back.
1. Pull lever 1 up and fold the backrest for-
ward.
2. Press and hold button 2 until the seat has
moved into the desired position.
3. After passengers have entered the rear, fold
the backrest back and lock it in place.
4. Press and hold button 3 until the seat has
moved back into its previous position. If you
release button 3 before this, the seat stops
in its current position.
You can lock the backrest in place when it
is folded forward. This is useful, for exam-
ple, when you get into the vehicle while it is
parked on a hill. Press the backrest until it audi-
bly locks into place. To fold it back, you do not
need to use lever 1 to release it.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
53
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Lock backrest warning lamp:
Lights up when the backrest is not
locked. At the same time, a message is
shown on the Control Display.
Safety belts
To ensure that the safety systems con-
tinue to provide optimized protection,
please follow the adjustment instructions on
page 48.<
Before every drive, make sure that safety belts
are being worn at all of the occupied seats. Air-
bags complement the safety belt as an addi-
tional safety device, but they do not represent a
substitute.
Fastening
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in
the belt buckle.
Releasing
1. Hold the belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
3. Guide the belt into its reel.
The shoulder strap's anchorage point will be in
the correct position for adults of every build if
the seat is correctly adjusted, refer to page 49.
Safety belt reminder for driver's seat
and passenger seat*
The indicator lamp lights up and a sig-
nal sounds. At the same time, an addi-
tional message appears on the Control
Display. Please check whether safety belts are
being worn correctly.
The safety belt reminder is operative at speeds
above approx. 5 mph/8 km/h. It can also be acti-
vated if objects are placed on the passenger
seat.
Damage to safety belts
In the event of loads caused by accidents
or other damage: replace the belt system
including the safety belt tensioners and any
child restraint systems, and have the belt
anchor points checked. Have this work carried
out only by a BMW center or a workshop that
works according to BMW repair procedures
with appropriately trained personnel. Other-
wise, correct operation of this safety equipment
is not guaranteed.<
Heated seats*
The temperature setting advances one step in
its control sequence each time you press the
button. The maximum temperature is supplied
when three LEDs are lit.
To switch off:
Press the button longer.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Adjusting
54
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
The mirror on the passenger's side is
more curved than the driver's mirror.
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than
they appear. Do not estimate the distance of
following traffic based on what you see in the
mirrors; otherwise, there is an increased acci-
dent risk.<
1 Adjusting
2 Switching to the other mirror or to the auto-
matic curb monitor
Storing the mirror positions, refer to Seat, mir-
ror and steering wheel memory on page 50.
Adjusting manually
You can also adjust the mirrors manually by
pressing against the outer edges of their mirror
glass.
Folding exterior mirrors in and out
To prevent the exterior mirrors from being
damaged due to the width of the vehicle,
always fold them in by hand before entering an
automatic car wash.<
Automatic heating
Below a certain outdoor temperature, both
exterior mirrors are automatically heated when
the motor is running or the ignition is switched
on.
Tilting down passenger-side mirror –
automatic curb monitor
Activating
1. Slide switch into the driver's side mirror
position, arrow 1.
2. Engage reverse gear or selector lever posi-
tion R.
The mirror glass tilts downward somewhat
on the passenger's side. This allows the
driver to see the area immediately adjacent
to the vehicle – such as a curb – when park-
ing, etc.
Deactivating
Slide switch into the passenger side mirror
position, arrow 2.
Interior and exterior mirrors, automatic
dimming feature
This feature is controlled by two photocells in
the inside rearview mirror. One is integrated
within the mirror's lens, while the other is
located at an offset position on the rear of the
mirror housing.
For trouble-free operation, keep the photocells
clean and do not cover the area between the
interior rearview mirror and the windshield.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
55
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Also do not attach stickers to the windshield in
front of the mirror.
Steering wheel
Adjusting
Do not adjust the steering wheel while the
vehicle is moving. There is a risk of acci-
dent as the result of unexpected movement.<
The steering wheel can be adjusted in four
directions.
Storing the steering-wheel position, refer to
Seat, mirror and steering wheel memory,
page 50.
Easy entry/exit
To make it easier to enter and exit the vehicle,
the steering wheel temporarily moves into the
uppermost position.
Steering wheel heater*
Press the button.
The indicator lamp in the button lights up when
the steering wheel heater is switched on.
Programmable buttons* on steering
wheel
You can program the buttons individually.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "Steering wheel
buttons" is selected and press the control-
ler.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Adjusting
56
A list of different functions appears:
> "Navigation voice instructions"
Voice instructions of the navigation sys-
tem
*
> "Air recirculation on / off"
Permanently shutting off outside air,
refer to AUC Automatic recirculated-air
control on page 109
> "Mute on / off"
Mutes the audio sources
> "Monitor on / off"
Switches the Control Display on/off
> "Telephone list"
*
Display/hide phone book or last list of
stored phone numbers displayed
> "Next entertainment source"
Changes audio source
> Switches "Night Vision on / off"
BMW Night Vision
*
on/off
5. Select the desired function unit and press
the controller.
6. Select the button if necessary and press the
controller.
You can now activate the selected function
using the corresponding button.
Operating function
Press the corresponding button on the steering
wheel.
If you have programmed "Navigation voice
instructions" for one of the buttons:
> To switch voice instructions on/off:
Press the button longer.
> To repeat the last voice instruction:
Press the button.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
57
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Transporting children safely
The right place for children
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger
themselves and other persons, e.g. by opening
the doors.<
Children always in the rear
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is in the back.
Children younger than 13 years of age or
with a height under 5 ft/150 cm may only
be transported in the rear in child restraint sys-
tems which correspond to the age, weight and
height of the child. Otherwise, there is an
increased danger of injury in an accident.<
Children 13 years of age or older must wear a
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint
system can no longer be used due to their age,
size and weight.
Exception for front passenger seat
Should it be necessary to use a child
restraint system on the front passenger
seat, the front, knee and side airbags on the
passenger side must be deactivated. Other-
wise, there is an increased risk of injury for the
child if the airbags are triggered, even with a
child restraint system.<
For more information on automatic deactivation
of the front passenger airbags, refer to page 95.
Installing child restraint
systems
Follow child restraint system manufac-
turer's instructions for the selection,
installation and use of child restraint systems.
Otherwise, the degree of protection they offer
may be reduced.<
On front passenger seat
After mounting a child restraint system on
the front passenger seat, make sure that
the front and side airbags on the front passen-
ger side are deactivated, as otherwise there is
an increased risk of injury if the airbags are trig-
gered.<
Child seat security
All rear safety belts and the safety belt for the
front passenger can be locked against pulling
out to secure child restraint systems.
Locking safety belt
1. Secure the child restraint system with the
belt.
2. Pull out the belt webbing completely.
3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and
pull taut against the child restraint system.
The safety belt is locked.
Unlocking safety belt
1. Open the belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint system.
3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in com-
pletely.
Coupe: child restraint system with
tether strap
Only use the tether-strap mounting
points to secure child restraint systems,
otherwise the mounting points could be dam-
aged.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Transporting children safely
58
There are two additional mounting points for
child restraint systems with a tether strap, refer
to arrows.
Placement of tether strap
1. Fold anchor fitting into upright position.
2. Push head restraint downward.
3. Guide tether strap over head restraint and
hook onto anchor fitting.
LATCH child restraint fixing system
LATCH: Lower Anchor and Tethers for CHil-
dren.
When installing and using LATCH child
restraint systems, comply with the sys-
tem manufacturer's operating and safety
instructions.<
Rear seats
Before attaching the LATCH child's seat, pull
the belt away from the region of the child
restraint fixing system.
The mounting points for the LATCH anchors
are located at the positions indicated by arrows
in the gap between the seat and the backrest.
Make sure that the LATCH anchor fittings
are properly engaged and the child
restraint system firmly contacts the backrest.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
59
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Driving
Ignition lock
Inserting remote control into ignition
lock
Insert the remote control as far as possible into
the ignition lock.
Radio readiness switches on.
Some electronic systems/consumers are ready
for operation.
Comfort access*
With comfort access, only insert the remote
control into the ignition lock in exceptional
cases, refer to page 37.
Removing remote control from ignition
lock
Do not pull the remote control out of the
ignition lock using force, as otherwise
damage may result.<
Before removing the remote control, first press
it in as far as possible to release the locking
device.
The ignition is switched off if it was still
switched on.
Automatic transmission
The remote control can only be removed when
the selector lever is in position P: interlock.
Start/Stop button
Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the
radio readiness or the ignition on and off.
The engine is started when you press the
Start/Stop button and depress the clutch
if the car has manual transmission or the brake if
the car has automatic transmission.<
Radio readiness
Some electronic systems/consumers are ready
for operation. The time and outside tempera-
ture are displayed in the instrument cluster.
Radio readiness is automatically switched off:
> when the remote control is removed from
the ignition lock
> with comfort access
*
by touching the sen-
sitive surface on the door handle, refer to
Locking doors on page 37
Ignition on
All electronic systems/consumers are ready for
operation. The odometer and the trip odometer
are displayed in the instrument cluster, refer to
page 75.
Please switch off the ignition and the
electronic systems/consumers which are
not required when the engine is not running to
save the battery.<
Radio readiness and ignition off
All indicator and warning lamps in the instru-
ment cluster go out.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Driving
60
Starting engine
Do not run the engine in closed rooms,
otherwise the inhalation of toxic exhaust
gases can cause unconsciousness and death.
The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide,
an odorless and colorless, but highly toxic gas.
Never leave an unattended vehicle with the
engine running, as such a vehicle represents a
potential safety hazard.
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run-
ning, shift into neutral or move the selector lever
into position P and firmly apply the handbrake,
otherwise the vehicle can begin to roll.<
Do not allow the engine to warm up by leaving it
running while the vehicle remains stationary.
Instead, drive off at a moderate engine speed.
Avoid frequent starting in quick succes-
sion or repeated starting attempts in
which the engine does not start. Otherwise, the
fuel is not burned at all or is burned inade-
quately and there is a danger of overheating and
damage to the catalytic converter.<
Manual transmission
Remote control in ignition lock or with comfort
access in vehicle, refer to page 37.
1. Depress brake pedal.
2. Depress the clutch pedal and select the
idling position.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
Automatic transmission*
Remote control in ignition lock or with comfort
access in vehicle, refer to page 37.
1. Depress brake pedal.
2. Place selector lever in position P or N.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
SMG Sequential Manual
Transmission*
Remote control in ignition lock or with comfort
access in vehicle, refer to page 37.
1. Depress brake pedal.
2. Move selector lever into position N and
make sure that this position is also indi-
cated in instrument cluster.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
If the engine fails to start, depress the
brake pedal and press the selector lever
to the right and then back into position N.
Watch the display in the instrument cluster
while doing so.<
Switching engine off
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
remote control with you.
When parking, firmly apply the handbrake, as
otherwise the vehicle could roll.<
Manual transmission
1. Press the Start/Stop button with the vehicle
stopped.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Firmly apply the handbrake.
4. Remove the remote control from the igni-
tion lock, refer to page 59.
SMG Sequential Manual
Transmission*
1. Firmly apply the handbrake.
2. Move selector lever into a drive position.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
If N is engaged when switching off the
engine, this will be pointed out to you opti-
cally and acoustically.
4. Remove the remote control from the igni-
tion lock, refer to page 59.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
61
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Automatic transmission*
1. Move selector lever into position P with
vehicle stopped.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
3. Firmly apply the handbrake.
4. Remove the remote control from the igni-
tion lock, refer to page 59.
Handbrake
The handbrake is primarily intended to prevent
the vehicle from rolling while parked; it brakes
the rear wheels.
Indicator lamp
The indicator lamp lights up, and a sig-
nal also sounds when starting off. The
handbrake is applied.
Indicator lamp for Canadian models.
Applying
The lever locks in position automatically.
Releasing
Pull slightly upwards, press the button and
lower the lever.
If exceptional circumstances should
make it necessary to apply the handbrake
while the vehicle is in motion, do not pull it too
firmly. In doing so, continuously press the but-
ton of the handbrake lever. Otherwise, too firm
an application of the handbrake can lock up the
rear wheels and cause the rear of the vehicle to
swerve.<
To prevent corrosion and one-sided brak-
ing action, occasionally engage the hand-
brake lightly when the vehicle is slowly coming
to a stop if the traffic conditions are suitable.
The brake lamps do not light up when the hand-
brake is applied.<
Manual transmission
When shifting into 5th/6th gear, press the
gearshift lever toward the right, otherwise
an inadvertent shift into 3rd or 4th gear could
lead to engine damage.<
Reverse gear
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
Press the gearshift lever to the left, overcoming
a slight resistance.
SMG Sequential Manual
Transmission*
The concept
The SMG Sequential Manual Transmission is
an automated manual transmission in which an
electrohydraulic system handles the clutching
and gear changes.
The SMG is operated with the selector lever
and two shift paddles on the steering wheel.
It offers the following functions:
> Choice of manual or automatic mode:
Sequential mode or Drive mode
> Choice of two drive programs: Normal or
Sport, refer to Dynamic Driving Control
page 64
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Driving
62
> Automatic downshifting and prevention of
incorrect shifting even in sequential opera-
tion
> Acceleration assistant, refer to page 65
Selector lever positions
> R: Reverse gear
> N: Neutral, idle
> One-touch functions for Sequential mode:
+: manual upshifting
–: manual downshifting
> D: activate/deactivate the Drive mode
The transmission automatically shifts
into N if the driver's door is opened with
the engine running and neither the pedals, the
shift paddles nor the selector lever are oper-
ated.
This is signaled by an acoustic signal and the
flashing display N in the instrument cluster; a
message appears on the Control Display.<
Gear display
R N 1 to 6
The currently engaged gear is displayed pre-
ceded by a D in Drive mode.
This display is your only way to be sure
the desired selector lever position is actu-
ally engaged.<
Shiftlock
Press the brake pedal before shifting out of N;
the shift command will not be executed unless
the brake is applied.
R Reverse
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
Sequential mode
After every engine start, as soon as the selector
lever is pushed to the right and the brake pedal
is pressed, the Sequential mode is activated.
You can shift up and down using the shifting
paddles or the selector lever. You do not need
to remove your foot from the accelerator to do
so.
It is also possible to start off in second gear, e.g.
in slippery conditions.
In the following situations, SMG thinks for you:
> Upshifts and downshifts are executed only
when they will result in a plausible combina-
tion of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for
example, the system will not execute a
downshift that would cause the engine to
overrev.
> When the vehicle is stationary, the trans-
mission automatically downshifts into first
gear.
> Shortly before dropping below a gear-
dependent minimum speed, the transmis-
sion downshifts automatically even without
your intervention.
D Drive mode
In the Drive mode, all forward gears are shifted
automatically.
To switch from Sequential to Drive mode:
Briefly press the selector lever to the right
toward D.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
63
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Kick-down: for rapid acceleration, e.g. passing,
press the accelerator pedal as far down as it will
go. You achieve maximum acceleration.
To switch back to the Sequential mode: press
the selector lever to the right again toward D or
shift using the shift paddles or the selector
lever.
Start off quickly on slopes. Do not hold
the vehicle on a hill by applying the throt-
tle, but engage the handbrake instead. Other-
wise, overheating can occur in the region of the
transmission.<
Gear changes
Using selector lever
> To upshift, pull the selector lever back.
> To downshift, push the selector lever for-
ward.
Using shift paddles on steering wheel
> To upshift, pull one of the shift paddles.
> To downshift, press.
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic*
In addition to the fully automatic mode, you can
also shift manually with Steptronic, refer to
page 64.
Selector lever positions
P R N D M/S + –
Displays in instrument cluster
P R N D DS M1 to M6
The selector lever position is indicated, and in
manual mode, the gear currently engaged.
Changing selector lever positions
> Only move the selector lever from
position P with the engine running: inter-
lock.
> With the vehicle stopped, press the brake
before shifting out of P or N; otherwise, the
selector lever is blocked: shiftlock.
To prevent the vehicle from creeping
after you select a driving position,
maintain pressure on the brake pedal until
you are ready to start.<
An interlock prevents inadvertent gearshifts
into selector lever positions R and P. To cancel
the interlock, press the button on the front of
the selector lever knob, refer to arrow.
P Park
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
The rear wheels are locked.
R Reverse
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Driving
64
N Neutral
You can select N in car washes, for example.
The vehicle can roll.
D Drive, automatic position
Position for normal vehicle operation.
All forward gears are available.
Under normal operating conditions, the fuel
consumption is lowest when driving in posi-
tion D.
Kick-down
The kick-down mode provides maximum accel-
eration:
Press the accelerator pedal beyond the full-
throttle resistance point.
Sport program and manual mode M/S
Move the selector lever from position D to the
left into shifting slot M/S:
The sport program is activated and DS is dis-
played in the instrument cluster. This position is
recommended for a performance-oriented driv-
ing style. It is engaged automatically when the
Dynamic Driving Control is activated, refer to
Dynamic Driving Control.
When the selector lever is briefly moved for-
ward or back, the manual mode is activated and
the Steptronic shifts gear. The instrument clus-
ter shows M1 through M6.
Upshifts and downshifts are executed only
when they will result in a plausible combination
of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for example,
the system will not execute a downshift that
would cause the engine to overrev. The
selected gear is briefly displayed in the instru-
ment cluster, followed by the current gear.
To use the automatic function again, move the
selector lever to the right into position D.
Deactivating selector lever interlock
If the selector lever is blocked in position P even
though the button on the selector lever is
pressed, the selector lever interlock can be
deactivated:
1. Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever.
2. Pull the sleeve up over the selector lever.
3. Using the screwdriver from the onboard
toolkit, refer to page 212, press the lever at
the point marked in red and move the selec-
tor lever into the desired position.
Dynamic Driving Control
The Dynamic Driving Control makes it possible
for your BMW to react in an even more perfor-
mance-oriented manner at the push of a button:
> The engine responds more spontaneously
to accelerator pedal movements.
> Cruise control:
The stored speed is reached more quickly
when requested.
Additionally with SMG:
> Gearshifts are faster.
> The engine speed range is used optimally in
the Drive mode.
With automatic transmission:
> The Sport program is activated.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
65
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Activating system
With the ignition switched on, press the SPORT
button.
The LED in the button lights up and SPORT is
displayed in the instrument cluster.
Deactivating system
> Press the SPORT button again or
> shift into reverse or
> switch off the engine.
The LED in the button and SPORT in the instru-
ment cluster go out.
Acceleration assistant with SMG
The acceleration assistant enables optimized
vehicle acceleration at race car level on road
surfaces with good adhesion when starting off.
Do not use the acceleration assistant too
often; otherwise, components will wear
prematurely.<
1. Activate the Dynamic Driving Control.
2. Deactivate DSC, refer to page 88.
3. Press the accelerator pedal down fully:
kick-down. The ideal starting-off engine
speed is set.
To maintain vehicle stability, reactivate
DSC afterward.<
Turn signals/
headlamp flasher
1 High beams
2 Headlamp flasher
3 Turn signals
Using turn signals
Move the lever beyond the resistance point.
To switch off manually, only press the lever to
the resistance point.
Atypically rapid flashing of the indicator
lamp indicates the failure of a turn signal
lamp.<
Signaling briefly
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold
it there as long as you wish to signal.
Triple turn signal activation
Press the lever to the resistance point; the turn
signals flash three times.
You can activate or deactivate this function.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Driving
66
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Lighting" is selected and
press the controller.
6. Select "Triple turn signal" and press the
controller.
Triple turn signal is activated.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Wiper system
1 Switching on wipers
2 Switching off wipers or brief wipe
3 Activating/deactivating rain sensor
4 Cleaning windshield, headlamps and
BMW Night Vision camera
*
5 Adjusting rain sensor sensitivity level
Switching on wipers
Pull the lever upward, arrow 1.
The lever automatically returns to its initial posi-
tion when released.
Normal wiper speed
Press once.
The system reverts to operation in the intermit-
tent mode whenever the vehicle is stationary.
Fast wiper speed
Briefly press twice or press beyond the resis-
tance point.
The system reverts to operation at normal
speed whenever the vehicle is stationary.
Rain sensor
Wiper operation is controlled automatically as a
function of the rain intensity. The rain sensor is
located on the windshield, directly in front of the
interior rearview mirror.
Activating rain sensor
Press the button, arrow 3. The LED in the but-
ton lights up.
Adjusting rain sensor sensitivity level
Turn the knurled wheel 5.
Deactivating rain sensor
Press the button again, arrow 3. The LED goes
out.
Deactivate the rain sensor when passing
through an automatic car wash. Failure to
do so could result in damage caused by undes-
ired wiper activation.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
67
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Cleaning windshield, headlamps and
BMW Night Vision camera*
Pull the lever, arrow 4:
The system sprays washer fluid against the
windshield and activates the wipers for a brief
period.
With the vehicle lighting switched on, the head-
lamps and the BMW Night Vision camera are
also cleaned simultaneously at suitable inter-
vals.
Do not use the washers if there is any
danger that the fluid will freeze on the
windshield. If you do so, your vision could be
obscured. To avoid freezing, use a washer fluid
antifreeze, refer to Washer fluid. Do not use
washers when the washer fluid reservoir is
empty, as this will damage the washer pump.<
Windshield washer nozzles
Both windshield washer nozzles are automati-
cally heated with the engine running or the igni-
tion switched on.
Washer fluid
Washer fluid antifreeze is flammable.
Always keep it well away from sparks and
open flames, and store it in tightly closed con-
tainers well out of the reach of children. Always
follow the instructions for use provided on the
containers.<
Filler neck for washer fluid
All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser-
voir.
Fill with water and – if required – with a washer
antifreeze, according to manufacturer's recom-
mendations.
In order to maintain the mixture ratio, mix
the washer fluid before filling.<
Capacity
Capacity approx. 5.3 US quarts/5 liters.
Cruise control
The concept
The cruise control is available for use at speeds
of approx. 20 mph/30 km/h and higher. The
vehicle stores and maintains the speed that you
set using the lever mounted on the steering col-
umn.
Do not use the cruise control under driv-
ing conditions that do not permit a con-
stant speed, e.g. when driving on winding
roads, in heavy traffic or in poor road conditions
such as snow, rain, ice, and loose road surface.
Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehicle
and cause an accident.<
One lever for all functions
1 Maintaining speed, storing speed, and
accelerating
2 Maintaining speed, storing speed, and
decelerating
3 Interrupting cruise control
4 Resuming stored speed
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Driving
68
Maintaining speed, storing speed, and
accelerating
Press lever to resistance point, arrow 1:
The system maintains and stores the current
vehicle speed. The display 1 in the speedome-
ter, see below, indicates this regulated speed.
Every time you press the lever, the vehicle's
speed increases by roughly 1 mph/1 km/h.
Press the lever to the resistance point and
hold it:
The vehicle accelerates without pressure on
the accelerator pedal. The system maintains
and stores your current speed as soon as you
release the lever.
Press the lever beyond the resistance point:
Increase speed each time to the next fives place
on the mph speedometer or to the next tens
place on the km/h speedometer.
If, on a downhill grade, the engine's braking
effect is not sufficient, the controlled speed can
be exceeded. Speed can drop on uphill grades if
the engine output is insufficient.
Maintaining speed, storing speed, and
decelerating
Pull the lever, arrow 2:
Functions are the same as 1, only the vehicle
speed is reduced.
Interrupting cruise control
Press the lever up or down, arrow 3.
Cruise control is also interrupted automatically:
> When you apply pressure to the brake pedal
> When you depress the clutch pedal or shift
the automatic transmission/SMG into posi-
tion N
> When DSC controls
Resuming stored speed
Press button 4:
The vehicle accelerates to and maintains the
stored speed.
Deactivating system
When the ignition is switched off, the system is
deactivated and the stored speed is deleted.
Displays in instrument cluster
1 Stored speed
2 Selected speed is displayed briefly
Active cruise control*
The concept
With active cruise control, you can select a
desired speed which is not only automatically
maintained when driving on open roadways, but
also varied to maintain a selected distance set-
ting as slower traffic is encountered.
Active cruise control is a technological advance
over the familiar cruise control and is a welcome
relief from the constant adjustment of speed
that can accompany driving in traffic on free-
ways or other high-speed thoroughfares. Espe-
cially on longer trips, the system can reduce
fatigue and tension, while increasing your
enjoyment of driving. Please use it safely and
responsibly.
In addition to holding a steady cruising speed, if
you do encounter slower vehicles ahead, active
cruise control will, within the scope of given
possibilities, adjust your vehicle's speed auto-
matically so that one can flow with the traffic
without frequent intervention by the driver. If,
for example, while cruising at the selected
speed, you begin to approach a slower vehicle
ahead of you in the same lane, the system will
reduce your vehicle's speed to the same as that
of the vehicle ahead to maintain your selected
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
69
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
distance setting between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead. You can vary the distance, which
is also speed-dependent. Based on your
selected distance setting, the system automat-
ically decreases the throttle setting and lightly
applies the brakes if necessary. The vehicle
brake lamps will automatically light up to signal
a following driver to take action. In addition, it
may be necessary for the vehicle or the driver to
downshift, depending on the kind of transmis-
sion your vehicle is equipped with, to maintain
the distance setting selected. If the vehicle
ahead speeds up or when the lane ahead
becomes clear, your vehicle will accelerate to
the speed you have selected by increasing the
throttle setting and shifting gears automatically
or with the aid of the driver as needed. Your
selected speed will also be held when driving
downhill, however it can be dropped below
when driving uphill if the engine output is insuf-
ficient.
The minimum desired speed is 20 mph or
30 km/h, and the maximum desired speed
110 mph or 180 km/h.
Active cruise control is not and must not
be used as a collision avoidance/warning
system.<
Since this active cruise control system is
a new technology and operates differ-
ently from conventional cruise control systems
which you may be accustomed to, you are
strongly urged to read all of the pages relating
to this system before use. Pay special attention
to the information contained in the Things to
know about active cruise control section begin-
ning on page 72.<
Professional* navigation system
If a navigation DVD is in the drive, refer to
page 126, the system adjusts the accelerating
and braking behavior of the vehicle to the road
you are driving on.
To ensure that the system is informed of
the current course of the road, always use
the latest navigation DVD if possible.<
The influence exerted by the navigation system
is canceled when the vehicle position is
unknown, e.g. when it has left the mapped
region.
Brake pedal feel
> When the system brakes and you also
depress the brake pedal, a somewhat differ-
ent braking feeling results.
> Any noises produced during automatic
braking are normal.
Manual transmission
You can shift gears with the cruise control acti-
vated. If you drive for extended periods at very
high or very low engine speeds, then a shifting
command is issued or the system is deacti-
vated.
SMG
If you drive for extended periods at very high
engine speeds in Sequential mode, then a shift-
ing command is issued or the system is deacti-
vated.
In the Drive mode, the SMG acts similarly to an
automatic transmission in the D position.
Operating active cruise control
1 Store and increase desired speed
2 Store and decrease desired speed
3 Deactivate system, refer to page 71
4 Resume stored desired speed and dis-
tance, refer to page 71
5 Select following distance to vehicle ahead,
refer to page 70
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Driving
70
Maintaining current speed
Briefly press lever, arrow 1, or briefly pull lever,
arrow 2, at a driving speed of more than approx.
20 mph or 30 km/h.
The speed currently being driven is stored and
maintained. It is indicated on the speedometer
and briefly in the instrument cluster.
Increasing desired speed
Press or briefly press the lever to the resistance
point or beyond, arrow 1, until the desired
speed is displayed.
The speed then displayed is stored and
reached on a clear road.
> Each time the lever is briefly pressed up to
the resistance point, the desired speed
increases by approx. 1 mph or 1 km/h.
> Each time the lever is pressed beyond the
resistance point, the desired speed
increases to the next fives place on the mph
speedometer or the next tens place on the
km/h speedometer.
Decreasing desired speed
Pull the lever, arrow 2, until the desired speed is
displayed.
These functions are operated in the same man-
ner as increasing your desired speed.
Selecting distance
> Downward:
Increase distance
> Upward:
Decrease distance
The selected distance is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster.
Use good judgment to select the appro-
priate following distance, given road con-
ditions, traffic, applicable laws and driving rec-
ommendations for a safe following distance.<
Distance 1
Distance 2
Distance 3
This distance is set when the sys-
tem is activated.
Distance 4
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
71
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Deactivating system
Press the lever up or down. The displays in the
instrument cluster disappear.
You also deactivate the system when you apply
the brakes, shift very slowly, or shift into neutral.
In addition, the system is deactivated automati-
cally:
> when you activate the DTC Dynamic Trac-
tion Control
> when you deactivate the DSC Dynamic Sta-
bility Control
> when the system does not recognize any
objects for a longer time, e.g. on infre-
quently traveled roads without a shoulder or
guard rails, or if the radar sensor is covered
with dirt, refer to page 72
> when the speed is reduced to below
20 mph/30 km/h due to a traffic situation
The system deactivates automatically
when the speed is set to below 20 mph/
30 km/h. A signal sounds and a message
appears in the Control Display. The active inter-
vention of the driver is required, otherwise there
is a risk of an accident.<
Resuming stored desired speed and
distance
Press button 4.
The displays appear in the instrument cluster.
When you switch off the ignition, the stored
desired speed is deleted.
Displays in instrument cluster
1 Stored desired speed
2 Lights up yellow: vehicle driving ahead is
detected
Flashes red, a signal sounds: the system
cannot establish the distance, you must
apply the brakes
Flashes yellow: driving stability control sys-
tems intervene, the active cruise control is
deactivated
3 Selected distance to vehicle driving ahead:
lights up as soon as the system is activated
4 Selected desired speed appears briefly
If the display ACC --- mph/km/h briefly
appears in the instrument cluster, it might
be that conditions necessary for operation are
not currently being met. To call up Check Con-
trol messages, refer to page 80.<
Warning lamps
The display 2 flashes red and a sig-
nal sounds.
The system is warning you to inter-
vene by braking or executing an
evasive maneuver. The active
cruise control cannot automatically restore the
distance to the vehicle driving ahead.
This display does not, however, relieve the
driver of the responsibility for adapting desired
speed and driving style to traffic conditions.
The display 2 flashes yellow.
Automatic intervention by ABS or
DSC. The active cruise control
intervenes by braking until you
actively take over.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Driving
72
Radar sensor
Heavy rain, dirt, snow, or ice can impair the
detection of vehicles ahead. If necessary, clean
the radar sensor under the front bumper. In
doing so, be especially careful when removing
layers of snow and ice.
If the sensor is incorrectly aligned, the active
cruise control cannot be activated.
Things to know about active cruise control
As with conventional cruise control sys-
tems, active cruise control in no way
diminishes or substitutes for the driver's own
personal responsibility, alertness and aware-
ness in adjusting speed, braking or otherwise
controlling the vehicle. The driver should
decide when to use the system on the basis of
road, traffic, visibility, and weather conditions.
Active cruise control is intended for use on free-
way-type roadways where traffic is moving rel-
atively smoothly. Do not use this system in city
driving; heavy traffic such as during rush hour;
on curvy, winding roads, slippery roads or roads
with sharp curves such as freeway off-ramps;
during inclement weather such as snow, heavy
rain or fog, or when entering interchanges, ser-
vice/parking areas or toll booths. It is also
important to regulate your vehicle's speed and
distance setting within applicable legal limits.
Always be ready to take action or apply the
brakes if necessary, especially when the sys-
tem is actively following a vehicle in front of
you.<
Always remember that the range and abil-
ity of the system does have physical limi-
tations. It will not apply the brakes or decelerate
your vehicle when there is a slow-moving vehi-
cle, stopped vehicle or stationary object ahead
of you, as for example at a traffic light or when
approaching a parked vehicle. Also, the system
does not react to oncoming traffic, pedestrians
or other types of potential traffic such as a rider
on horseback. It is also possible that the system
may not detect smaller moving objects such as
motorcycles or bicycles. Be especially alert
when encountering any of these situations as
the system will neither automatically brake, nor
provide a warning to you. Also, be aware that
every decrease in the distance setting allows
your vehicle to come closer to a vehicle in front
of you and requires a heightened amount of
alertness.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
73
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
If your vehicle is actively following a vehicle in
front of you and the vehicle ahead speeds up or
the lane ahead becomes clear, then your vehi-
cle will accelerate to the speed you have
selected. Be aware that changing to a clear,
unobstructed lane will also result in your vehicle
accelerating.
Be certain to deactivate the system when
you pull into an exit lane for a freeway off-
ramp.<
Also, vehicles traveling in a staggered manner
on a freeway may cause a delay in the system's
reaction to a vehicle in front of you or may cause
the system to react to a vehicle actually in the
lane next to you. Always be ready to take action
or apply the brakes if necessary.
Active cruise control can only decelerate the
vehicle to approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. If the sys-
tem reduces vehicle speed below 20 mph/
30 km/h or if DSC/ABS is activated while driv-
ing, the system will automatically deactivate.
Remember, the system cannot stop your
vehicle. In addition, the system is deacti-
vated whenever the driver applies the vehicle
brakes, shifts into neutral, or deactivates DSC.
After any deactivation, the system will no longer
automatically activate the vehicle brakes, which
means the driver must intervene and resume
manual braking. You should then reactivate the
system only when you are fully aware of the
prior speed and distance settings.<
Active cruise control may brake when you
reduce the stored desired speed; however, the
driver must constantly monitor traffic and inter-
vene if necessary.
When you switch off the engine or ignition,
active cruise control is fully switched off, too,
and any settings you have selected are can-
celed.
Swerving vehicles
When a vehicle moves from an adjacent lane
into your lane, active cruise control will not rec-
ognize this vehicle until it is fully in your lane
ahead of your vehicle.
Behavior in curves
Because of the limited range of the system, it is
possible that in curves or on the peaks and val-
leys of hilly roads, a vehicle ahead may be rec-
ognized late, or not at all. Therefore, it is up to
the driver to select a speed that is prudent in
view of the curves and terrain of the roadway.
In approaching a curve, it is possible that active
cruise control would react briefly to a vehicle in
the adjacent lane. In addition, the system can
sense if your vehicle is in a curve and may not
accelerate. If your vehicle decelerates in either
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Driving
74
case, you can choose to overcome the deceler-
ation by briefly pressing the accelerator pedal.
Driver interventions
Anytime the driver presses down on the
accelerator pedal, any automatic braking
action by the system is interrupted until the
pedal is fully released. As soon as you release
the accelerator fully the system again controls
your cruising speed and distance setting. While
driving with the system activated, resting your
foot on the accelerator pedal will cause the sys-
tem not to brake even if necessary. Be certain
that floormats or other objects on the vehicle
floor do not interfere with movement of the
accelerator pedal.<
While active cruise control is capable of
braking your vehicle automatically when
you approach a slower vehicle ahead, it is
important to be aware that the ability of the sys-
tem to apply the brakes is also limited, e.g.
when you reduce your desired speed sharply.
The system cannot stop your vehicle. It uses
only a portion of braking system capacity and
does not utilize the full capacity of the vehicle
braking system. Therefore, the system cannot
decrease your speed due to large differences in
speed between your vehicle and the vehicle
ahead. Example: when you approach a vehicle
traveling at a much lower speed than your own
speed such as approaching a toll booth or when
a much slower vehicle cuts in front of you at
close range.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
75
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Everything under control
Odometer, outside
temperature display, clock
1 Time, outside temperature, and date
2 Odometer and trip odometer
3 Press button:
> with ignition switched on, trip odometer
is reset
> with ignition switched off, time, outside
temperature and odometer are briefly
displayed
From radio readiness, the outside temperature
and the time are displayed.
To request the date:
Press the CHECK button in the turn signal lever,
refer to page 81.
To set time and date, refer to page 83.
You can set the unit of measure 7 or 6 on the
Control Display, refer to Units of measure on
page 85.
Outside temperature warning
If the display drops to +377/+36, a signal
sounds and a warning lamp lights up. A mes-
sage appears on the Control Display. There is
an increased danger of ice.
Ice can form even at temperatures above
+377/+36. Drive carefully, especially
on bridges and shaded roadways; otherwise,
your risk of accident increases.<
Tachometer
The white-striped advance warning field,
arrow 1, changes depending on the engine
temperature. The segments disappear in
sequence as the engine warms to its normal
operating temperature.
Avoid allowing the engine speed to rise as far as
the advance warning field whenever possible.
It is absolutely crucial to avoid engine speeds in
the red warning field, arrow 2.
In this range, the fuel supply is interrupted to
protect the engine.
Coolant temperature
Should the coolant and therefore the engine
become too hot, a warning lamp lights up. In
addition, a message appears on the Control
Display.
Checking coolant level, refer to page 209.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Everything under control
76
Engine oil temperature gauge
During normal operation, the engine oil temper-
ature is between approx. 1607/706 and
approx. 3407/170 6.
If the engine oil temperature is too high, a mes-
sage is shown on the Control Display.
Fuel gauge
Fuel tank capacity: approx. 18.5 US gal/
70 liters, including the reserve capacity of
approx. 2.6 US gal/10 liters. You can find infor-
mation on refueling on page 198.
If the tilt of the vehicle varies for a longer period,
when you are driving in mountainous areas, for
example, the indicator may fluctuate slightly.
Reserve
After the reserve quantity has been reached, a
message briefly appears on the Control Display;
the cruising range is shown in the computer.
Below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km, the
message remains on the Control Display.
Refuel as soon as possible once your
cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km, otherwise engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<
Computer
Displays in instrument cluster
To display the information, press the BC button
in the turn signal lever.
The following information is displayed in the
specified order:
> Cruising range
> Average speed
> Average fuel consumption
Cruising range
Displays the estimated cruising range available
with the remaining fuel. The range is projected
based on the driving style over the last 20 miles/
30 km.
Refuel as soon as possible once your
cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km, otherwise engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<
Average speed
Periods with the vehicle parked and the engine
switched off are not included in the calculations
of average speed.
To reset the average speed: press the BC but-
ton in the turn signal lever for approx. 2 sec-
onds.
Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
the time during which the engine is running.
To reset the average fuel consumption: press
the BC button in the turn signal lever for approx.
2 seconds.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
77
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
For different routes
You can display the average speed and average
consumption for two different routes on the
Control Display, refer to the following and to
Trip computer.
Displays on Control Display
You can also call up the computer via iDrive, for
explanation of principle, refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the right to open
"Navigation".
Without navigation system
*
: open "Car
Data".
3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.
4. Select "Onboard info" and press the con-
troller.
> Estimated time of arrival at destination and
remaining distance:
> Entering a distance manually in the com-
puter, see below.
> Entering a destination in the navigation
system
*
, refer to page 126.
> Cruising range
> Average speed
> Average fuel consumption
Resetting values
You can reset the values for average speed and
average fuel consumption:
1. Select the desired menu item and press the
controller.
2. Press the controller again to confirm.
Entering a distance manually
1. Select "Distance to dest." and press the
controller.
2. Turn the controller to select the distance
to your destination. If necessary, hold it
against a slight resistance to enter a greater
difference.
3. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The distance is automatically predetermined
during the destination guidance of the naviga-
tion system
*
.
Trip computer
The trip computer is suitable for a vacation trip,
for example.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Open "Navigation".
Without navigation system
*
: open "Car
Data".
3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Everything under control
78
4. Select "Trip computer" and press the con-
troller.
> Departure time
> Driving time
> Distance traveled
> Average speed
> Average fuel consumption
Switching trip computer on/off and resetting
all values:
1. Select "Set" and press the controller.
2. Select the desired menu item and press the
controller.
Display options
You can display the computer or the trip com-
puter in the assistance window.
1. Move the controller to the right to change to
the assistance window and press the con-
troller.
2. Select a menu item:
> "Onboard info"
> "Trip computer".
3. Press the controller.
Service requirements
The remaining driving distance and the date for
the next maintenance are displayed briefly with
the ignition switched on.
Your BMW Service Advisor can deter-
mine your vehicle's current service
requirements by reading out the data stored in
the remote control.<
Additional information
You can view more detailed information by
using the Control Display, for explanation of
principle, refer to page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Info sources" and press the control-
ler.
4. Select "Service" and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
79
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Service requirements" is
selected and press the controller.
6. Select "Status" and press the controller.
The display shows a list of selected service and
maintenance procedures, as well as legally
mandated official inspections.
You can request more detailed information on
every entry.
Select the entry and press the controller.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Symbols
No service is currently required.
The deadline for service or an official
inspection is approaching. Please
arrange a service appointment.
The service deadline has already passed.
Entering deadlines for legally required
inspections*
Make sure the date on the Control Display is set
correctly, refer to page 84; otherwise, the effec-
tiveness of CBS Condition Based Service is not
ensured.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Info sources" and press the control-
ler.
4. Select "Service" and press the controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Service requirements" is
selected and press the controller.
6. Select "Status" and press the controller.
7. Select "State inspection" and press the
controller.
8. Select "Set service date" and press the
controller. The month is selected.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Everything under control
80
9. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
10. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The year is selected.
11. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
12. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The date entry is stored.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Check Control
The concept
The Check Control monitors functions in the
vehicle and issues a message if there is a mal-
function in the monitored systems. A Check
Control message of this kind includes indicator
or warning lamps in the instrument cluster, pos-
sibly an acoustic signal, and text messages at
the bottom of the Control Display.
Indicator and warning lamps
The indicator and warning lamps can light up in
different combinations and colors.
This symbol means that a Check Control
message has been generated. The symbol
remains visible even if the Check Control mes-
sage has been hidden after a short time. The
combinations of warning lamps and text mes-
sages are stored and can be viewed later, also
refer to page 81.
Explanatory text messages
Text messages at the bottom edge of the Con-
trol Display explain the meaning of the indicator
and warning lamps displayed.
You can display supplementary information
regarding most Check Control messages, e.g.
as to the cause of a malfunction and corre-
sponding actions to be taken, see below.
In urgent cases, this information will be shown
as soon as the corresponding lamp lights up.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
81
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
To exit the displayed information:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Hiding Check Control messages
Press the CHECK button in the turn signal lever.
Some Check Control messages are displayed
until the malfunctions have been rectified. They
cannot be hidden. If a number of these malfunc-
tions occur simultaneously, they are displayed
in succession.
Other messages are automatically hidden after
approx. 20 seconds, but remain stored.
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
1. Press the button longer:
The first stored message is displayed.
2. Press the button:
A new message appears each time you
press the button.
Displaying supplementary information
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Info sources" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "Service" is
selected and press the controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Check Control messages"
is selected and press the controller.
6. Select a message and press the controller.
To exit from the menu immediately:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Everything under control
82
Displaying the urgency of malfunctions
Depending on the equipment, the stored Check
Control messages are also displayed with the
following symbols:
No malfunctions detected in the moni-
tored systems.
Malfunctions detected in the monitored
systems. Depending on the malfunction,
supplementary information is shown on
the Control Display.
The symbols also indicate the status of the ser-
vice requirements display, refer to page 78.
Displays after completion of trip
Malfunction reports generated during the trip
are shown consecutively when you switch off
the ignition.
Before the display disappears, you can display
the messages once again. Press the CHECK
button for approx. 2 seconds. If several mes-
sages are present, you can press the CHECK
button repeatedly.
The display:
> turns off automatically after a brief period
> can be turned off at any time by pressing
the CHECK button again for approx. 2 sec-
onds
Speed limit
You can enter a speed and a Check Control
message indicates when you have reached
this speed. This enables you, for example, to
receive warnings if you exceed a speed limit in
an urban area.
You are only warned of reaching this speed a
second time if your vehicle speed falls below it
again by at least 3 mph/5 km/h.
Displaying, setting or changing limit
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Open "Navigation".
Without navigation system
*
: open "Car
Data".
3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.
4. Select "Limit" and press the controller.
5. Select the speed value and press the con-
troller.
6. Turn the controller to set the limit. If neces-
sary, hold it against a slight resistance to
enter a greater difference.
7. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The limit is automatically switched on.
Applying your current speed as limit
Select "Select current speed" and press the
controller. The system applies your current
speed as the limit.
Activating limit
Select "On" and press the controller.
The limit is automatically switched on.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
83
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Stopwatch
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Open "Navigation".
Without navigation system
*
: open "Car
Data".
3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.
4. Select "Stopwatch" and press the control-
ler.
Starting, stopping, or resetting
> Select "Start" and press the controller.
The stopwatch starts at the displayed time.
> Select "Reset" and press the controller.
The stopwatch is reset and it restarts if it
was running beforehand.
> Select "Stop" and press the controller.
This stops the timer.
Taking an intermediate time reading
Select "Interim time" and press the controller.
The interim time appears below the ongoing
primary stopwatch count.
All of the remaining functions remain
available at all times while the stopwatch
is running. The stopwatch continues to operate
in the background.<
Settings on Control Display
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button once or twice until
the start menu appears.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
Setting time
1. Turn the controller until "Time / Date" is
selected and press the controller.
2. Move the controller once to the front if nec-
essary to change to the first field from the
top.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Everything under control
84
3. Turn the controller until "Time" is selected
and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "Set time" is
selected and press the controller.
Making settings
1. Turn the controller to set the hours and
press the controller.
2. Turn the controller to set the minutes and
press the controller.
The changed time is stored.
Activating hour signal*
You will hear three tones just before each full
hour.
Select "Hour memo" and press the controller.
The hour signal is activated.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Setting time format
1. Select "Time format" and press the control-
ler.
2. Select the desired format and press the
controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Setting date
1. Select "Date" and press the controller.
2. Select "Set date" and press the controller.
The first section of the date display is
selected, in this case the month.
3. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
4. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The next adjustment is selected.
5. Make the remaining adjustments. After the
last adjustment, the date is stored.
Changing date format
1. Select "Date format" and press the control-
ler.
2. Select the desired format and press the
controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Brightness of Control Display
The brightness is automatically adapted to the
ambient lighting conditions. However, you can
change the base setting.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
85
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Display settings" and press the
controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Brightness" is selected and
press the controller.
6. If necessary, move the controller to the right
to select "Display".
7. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Units of measure
You can change the units of measure for fuel
consumption, distances, temperature and
pressure.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Language / Units" and press the
controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Units" is selected and press
the controller.
6. Select the menu item to be set.
7. Press the controller.
8. Select the desired unit of measure and
press the controller.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Language on Control Display
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Language / Units" and press the
controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Languages" is selected and
press the controller.
6. Select "Text language" and press the con-
troller. You can select a different language
for the text displays.
7. Select the desired language and press the
controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
86
Technology for comfort, convenience and
safety
PDC Park Distance Control*
The concept
The PDC assists you when you are parking.
Acoustic signals and an optical display
*
alert
you to the approach of an object from behind
your vehicle. To measure the distance, there
are four ultrasonic sensors in each bumper.
The range of these sensors is approx. 7 ft/2 m.
However, an acoustic warning first sounds for
the sensors at the front and at the two rear cor-
ners at approx. 24 in/60 cm, and for the center
rear sensors at approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.
PDC is a parking aid that can indicate the
presence of objects when they are being
approached slowly, as is usually the case when
parking. Avoid approaching an object at high
speed; otherwise, the physical circumstances
could cause the system warning to be activated
too late.<
Switching on automatically
The system starts to operate approx. 1 second
after you shift into reverse gear or move the
selector lever into position R with the engine
running or the ignition switched on.
Wait this short period before driving.
Switching on manually
Press the button; the LED lights up.
Switching off manually
Press the button again; the LED goes out.
After driving approx. 165 ft/50 m or at over
approx. 20 mph/30 km/h, the system is
switched off and the LED goes out. You can
reactivate the system manually as needed.
Signal tones
An intermittent signal indicates the distance of
the vehicle from an object being approached.
Thus, an object detected to the left rear of the
vehicle will be indicated by a signal tone from
the left rear speaker, etc. As the distance
between vehicle and object decreases, the
intervals between the tones become shorter. If
the distance to the nearest object falls to below
roughly 1 ft/30 cm, then a continuous tone
sounds.
An intermittent tone is interrupted after approx.
3seconds:
> if you remain in front of an object that was
only detected by one of the corner sensors
> if you drive parallel to a wall
Malfunction
The LED in the button flashes and a message
appears on the Control Display. PDC is mal-
functioning. Have the system checked.
As a preventive measure, keep the sensors
clean and free of ice or snow in order to ensure
that they will continue to operate effectively. Do
not spray the sensors with high-pressure clean-
ers for long periods and maintain a distance of
at least 4 in/10 cm to them.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
87
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
PDC with visual warning*
You can also enjoy the option of having the sys-
tem show the approach to an object on the
Control Display. Objects that are farther away
are already shown there before a signal tone
sounds. The setting is stored for the remote
control currently in use.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "Vehicle / Tires" is
selected and press the controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "PDC" is selected and press
the controller.
6. Select "PDC display on" and press the con-
troller.
The PDC screen is activated.
The display appears on the Control Display as
soon as PDC is activated.
System limits
Even with PDC, final responsibility for
estimating the distance between the
vehicle and any obstacles always remains with
the driver. Even when sensors are involved,
there is a blind spot in which objects cannot be
detected. The system is also subject to the
physical limits that apply to all forms of ultra-
sonic measurement, such as those encoun-
tered with tow bars and trailer couplings, or thin
and wedge-shaped objects etc. Low objects
already displayed, e.g. curbs, can also disap-
pear from the detection area of the sensors
again before or after a continuous tone already
sounds. Higher, protruding objects, e.g. ledges,
cannot be detected.
Loud noises from outside and inside the vehicle
may prevent you from hearing the PDC signal
tone.<
Driving stability control
systems
Your BMW is equipped with an extended array
of systems designed to enhance and maintain
vehicle stability under extreme conditions.
ABS Antilock Brake System
ABS prevents the wheels from locking during
braking. Safe steering response is maintained
even during hard braking. This increases active
driving safety.
ABS is operational every time you start the
engine. For information on safe braking, refer to
page 121.
CBC Cornering Brake Control
This system provides further enhancements to
vehicle stability and steering response when
braking while cornering or when braking during
a lane change.
Electronic brake-force distribution
This system controls the brake system's appli-
cation pressure at the rear wheels to ensure
stable deceleration.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
88
Brake assistant
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically produces the maximum braking
force boost and thus helps to achieve the short-
est possible braking distance during full brak-
ing. This system exploits all of the benefits pro-
vided by ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
for the duration of the full braking.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
DSC prevents traction loss in the driving wheels
when starting off and accelerating. The system
also identifies unstable driving conditions, such
as a loss of traction at the rear of the vehicle or
sliding of the vehicle in its front wheels. In these
cases, DSC helps the vehicle safely stay on
course within the physical limits by reducing the
engine output and by applying the brakes differ-
ently in the individual wheels.
The laws of physics cannot be repealed,
even with DSC. An appropriate driving
style always remains the responsibility of the
driver. Therefore, do not restrict the additional
safety margin with a risky driving style, as other-
wise there is a risk of an accident.<
Deactivating DSC
Press the button until the DSC indicator lamp in
the instrument cluster lights up, but not for
longer than approx. 10 seconds. DTC Dynamic
Traction Control and DSC are deactivated
together. Interventions promoting stability and
forward momentum will no longer be carried
out. The stability-promoting intervention of the
active steering
*
is also deactivated, refer to
page 94.
A message appears on the Control Display.
Please note any supplementary information
that appears there.
To support enhanced operating stability, reacti-
vate DSC again as soon as possible.
Activating DSC
Press the button; the indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out.
For better control
The indicator lamp flashes:
DSC is controlling the drive forces and
brake forces.
The indicator lamp lights up:
DSC is deactivated.
DTC Dynamic Traction Control
DTC is a variant of DSC for special road condi-
tions, e.g. uncleared snow-covered roads, that
is optimized for forward momentum. The sys-
tem ensures maximum forward momentum, but
with limited driving stability. Therefore, drive
with appropriate caution.
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC
under the following special circumstances:
> When driving on snowy inclines, in slush, or
on unplowed, snow-covered road surfaces
> When rocking a stuck vehicle free or when
starting off in deep snow or on loose ground
> When driving with snow chains
*
Activating DTC
Press the button; the DTC indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster lights up.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
89
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
For better control
The indicator lamp flashes:
DSC is controlling the drive forces and
brake forces.
The indicator lamp lights up:
DTC is activated.
Deactivating DTC
Press the button again; the DTC indicator lamp
in the instrument cluster goes out.
Malfunction in driving stability control
systems
The warning lamp for the brake system
lights up, together with the Indicator
and warning lamps for ABS, DSC and
Tire Pressure Monitor or Flat Tire Mon-
itor. A message appears on the Control
Display. The driving stability control
systems have failed. Conventional
braking efficiency remains available
without limitations. While you may con-
tinue, you should remember to proceed
cautiously and drive defensively while avoiding
full brake applications. In addition, the Tire
Pressure Monitor or the Flat Tire Monitor has
also failed. Have the system checked as soon as
possible.
Display of the previously described
malfunction on Canadian models.
The DSC indicator lamp lights up. A
message appears on the Control Dis-
play. A malfunction has occurred in the
DSC and DTC. The stability maintenance func-
tions are no longer available. The vehicle
remains operational. Have the system checked
as soon as possible.
The brake system warning lamp lights
up yellow. A message appears on the
Control Display. The brake assistant is
defective. Have the system checked as soon as
possible.
Display of the previously described
malfunction on Canadian models.
Dynamic Drive*
The concept
Dynamic Drive minimizes body roll and opti-
mizes vehicle stability during cornering and
evasive maneuvers.
Dynamic Drive is based on active stabilizers on
the front and rear axles. Suspension compli-
ance adapts to suit driving conditions, varying
from performance-oriented during cornering to
smooth and comfort-oriented when the vehicle
is proceeding in a straight line. During vehicle
operation, the system continuously runs
through closed-loop control cycles lasting only
fractions of a second.
The system assumes operational status each
time you start the engine.
FTM Flat Tire Monitor*
The concept
The Flat Tire Monitor keeps track of the infla-
tion pressures in the tires as you drive. The sys-
tem provides an alert whenever the inflation
pressure drops significantly in relation to the
pressure in another tire.
In the event of a pressure loss, the rolling radius
and therefore the rotation speed of the wheels
change. This change is detected and signaled
as a flat tire.
Functional requirement
To ensure the reliable signaling of a flat tire, the
system must be initialized at the correct tire
inflation pressure.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
90
The initialization must be repeated after
every correction of the tire inflation pres-
sure and after every tire or wheel change.<
System limits
The Flat Tire Monitor cannot indicate
sudden severe tire damage caused by
outside factors and does not detect a natural,
even pressure drop in all four tires.<
In the following situations, the system could be
delayed or malfunction:
> System has not been initialized
> Driving on snow-covered or slippery roads
> Sporty driving style: slip in the drive wheels,
high lateral acceleration
> Driving with snow chains
*
Initializing system
The initialization finishes during driving,
which can be interrupted at any time.
When driving resumes, the initialization is auto-
matically continued.
Do not initialize the system when driving with
snow chains
*
.<
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "FTM" is selected and press
the controller.
6. Start the engine, but do not start driving.
7. Select "Reset" and press the controller.
8. Select "Yes" and press the controller.
9. Start to drive.
The message "resetting FTM …" is dis-
played.
The initialization is completed during driving.
Indication of a flat tire
The warning lamp lights up in red. A
message appears on the Control Dis-
play. In addition, an acoustic signal
sounds. There is a flat tire or extensive inflation
pressure loss.
1. Cautiously reduce the vehicle speed to
below 50 mph/80 km/h. Avoid severe brak-
ing and steering maneuvers and do not
exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Stop driving if the vehicle is no longer
equipped with run-flat tires, as it was
when it came from the factory, refer to
page 204. Continued driving after a flat tire
can result in serious accidents.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
91
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
2. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the
next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor
may not have been initialized. The system
must then be initialized.<
3. In the event of complete tire pressure loss,
0 psi/0 kPa, you can estimate the possible
distance for continued driving on run-flat
tires, based on the following guide values:
> With low load:
1 to 2 persons without luggage:
approx. 155 miles/250 km.
> With medium load:
2 persons, luggage compartment full, or
4 persons without luggage:
approx. 94 miles/150 km.
> With full load:
4 persons, luggage compartment full:
approx. 30 miles/50 km.
Drive reservedly and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. In the
event of pressure loss, vehicle handling
changes. This includes reduced tracking
stability in braking, extended braking dis-
tances and altered natural steering charac-
teristics.
If unusual vibrations or loud noises occur
while the vehicle is being driven, this can
indicate final failure of the damaged tire.
Reduce speed and stop at a suitable loca-
tion as soon as possible; otherwise, pieces
of the tire could become detached and
cause an accident. Do not continue driving,
but instead contact your BMW center.<
TPM Tire Pressure Monitor*
The concept
TPM checks the tire inflation pressure in the
four mounted tires. The system reports when
the tire inflation pressure has dropped consid-
erably in one or several tires.
Functional requirement
In order to assure the reliable reporting of a flat
tire, the system must have been reset with the
correct tire inflation pressure.
Always use wheels with TPM electronics, oth-
erwise fault-free operation of the system is not
ensured.
Reset the system again after each correc-
tion of the tire inflation pressure and after
every tire or wheel change.<
System limits
TPM cannot announce sudden serious
tire damage caused by external influ-
ences.<
The system does not function properly if it has
not been reset, e.g. a flat tire is reported despite
correct tire inflation pressures.
The system is inactive and cannot display a flat
tire if a wheel has been mounted without TPM
electronics, or if TPM is temporarily interfered
with by other systems or devices which use the
same radio frequency.
Status display on Control Display
The tire and system status is indicated by the
color of the tires.
TPM takes the fact that the tire pressure
changes during driving into account. A correc-
tion is only required if requested by TPM with
the color.
Green
The tire pressure matches the learned set state.
"TPM active" is displayed on the Control Dis-
play.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
92
One wheel is yellow
Flat tire or a major drop in inflation pressure in
the indicated tire. A message appears on the
Control Display.
All wheels are yellow
Flat tire or a major drop in inflation pressure in
several tires. A message appears on the Control
Display.
Gray
The system cannot detect a flat tire.
Reasons for this can be:
> TPM is being reset
> Temporary interference due to systems or
devices which use the same radio fre-
quency
> Malfunction
Resetting system
Reset the system again after each correc-
tion of the tire inflation pressure and after
every tire or wheel change.<
Resetting finishes during driving, which can be
interrupted at any time. When driving resumes,
resetting is continued automatically.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "TPM" is selected and press
the controller.
6. Start the engine, but do not start driving.
7. Select "Reset" and press the controller.
8. Select "Yes" and press the controller.
9. Start to drive.
The tires are shown in gray and "Resetting
TPM..." is displayed.
After a few minutes of driving, the set tire infla-
tion pressures in the tires are applied as the set
values to be monitored. Resetting finishes dur-
ing driving. The tires are shown in green on the
Control Display.
If a flat tire is detected during resetting
and applying the tire inflation pressures,
all tires are shown in yellow on the Control Dis-
play. The message "Tire low!" is displayed.<
Message with low tire inflation
pressure
The warning lamp lights up yellow. A
message appears on the Control Dis-
play. In addition, an acoustic signal
sounds. There is a flat tire or extensive inflation
pressure loss.
1. Cautiously reduce speed to below 50 mph/
80 km/h. Avoid sudden braking and steer-
ing maneuvers. Do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
93
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Stop driving if the vehicle is no longer
equipped with run-flat tires, as it was
when it came from the factory, refer to
page 204. Continued driving after a flat tire
can result in serious accidents.<
2. In the event of complete tire pressure loss,
0 psi/0 kPa, you can estimate the possible
distance for continued driving on the basis
of the following guide values:
> With low load:
1 to 2 persons without luggage:
approx. 155 miles/250 km
> With medium load:
2 persons, luggage compartment full, or
4 persons without luggage:
approx. 95 miles/150 km
> With full load:
4 persons, luggage compartment full:
approx. 30 miles/50 km
Drive reservedly and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. In the event of
pressure loss, vehicle handling changes. This
includes reduced tracking stability in braking,
extended braking distances and altered natural
steering characteristics.
If unusual vibrations or loud noises occur while
the vehicle is being driven, this can indicate final
failure of the damaged tire. Reduce speed and
stop at a suitable location as soon as possible;
otherwise, pieces of the tire could become
detached and cause an accident. Do not con-
tinue driving, but instead contact your BMW
center.<
Malfunction
The yellow warning lamp flashes and
then lights up continuously. The tires
are shown in gray on the Control Dis-
play and a message is displayed. No flat tire can
be detected.
A message like this is displayed in the following
situations:
> In case of a malfunction;
have the system checked.
> If a wheels is mounted without TPM elec-
tronics.
> If TPM is temporarily interfered with by
other systems or devices which use the
same radio frequency.
Declaration according to NHTSA/
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring
Systems
Each tire should be checked monthly when cold
and inflated to the inflation pressure recom-
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If
your vehicle has tires of a different size than the
size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire infla-
tion pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires. As
an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sys-
tem, TPMS, that illuminates a low tire pressure
indicator when one or more of your tires are sig-
nificantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the
low tire pressure indicator illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pres-
sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure indicator.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure indicator. When the
system detects a malfunction, the indicator will
flash for approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehi-
cle startups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,
the system may not be able to detect or signal
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunc-
tions may occur for a variety of reasons, includ-
ing the installation of replacement or alternate
tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
94
the TPMS malfunction indicator after replacing
one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires
and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to func-
tion properly.
Active steering*
The concept
The active steering is a system that actively var-
ies the steering angle of the front wheels in rela-
tion to the steering wheel movements.
When you are driving in the low road speed
range, e.g. in a town or when parking, the steer-
ing angle increases, i.e. the steering becomes
very direct. In the higher speed range, on the
other hand, the steering angle is reduced more
and more. This improves the handling capability
of your BMW over the entire speed range.
In critical situations, the system can make tar-
geted corrections to the steering angle pro-
vided by the driver and thus stabilize the vehicle
before the driver intervenes. This stability-pro-
moting intervention is deactivated when DSC is
switched off, refer to page 88.
Malfunction
The warning lamp lights up yellow and
a message is shown on the Control Dis-
play. The active steering is no longer
operational. At low speed, larger steering wheel
movements are required, while the vehicle
reacts more sensitively to steering wheel move-
ments in the higher road speed range. The sta-
bility-promoting intervention can also be deac-
tivated. Proceed cautiously and drive
defensively. Have the system checked.
Brake force display
> On the left: normal braking.
> On the right: heavy braking.
Airbags
The following airbags are located under the
marked covers:
1 Front airbags
2 Coupe: head airbags
3 Side airbags
4 Knee airbag
5 Knee airbag
Protective action
To ensure that the safety systems con-
tinue to provide optimized protection,
please follow the adjustment instructions on
page 48.<
The front airbags help protect the driver and
front passenger by responding to frontal
impacts in which safety belts alone cannot pro-
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
95
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
vide adequate restraint. When needed, the
head and side airbags help provide protection in
the event of a side impact. The relevant side air-
bag supports the side upper body area. The
head airbag supports the head. The knee airbag
protects the legs from colliding with the cockpit.
The airbags are deliberately not triggered in
every impact situation, e.g. less severe acci-
dents or rear-end collisions.
Do not apply adhesive materials to the
cover panels of the airbags, cover them or
modify them in any other way. Do not attempt to
remove the airbag restraint system from the
vehicle. Do not modify or tamper with either the
wiring or the individual components in the air-
bag system. This category includes the uphol-
stery in the center of the steering wheel, on the
instrument panel, the side trim panels on the
doors and on the Coupe, the roof pillars along
with the sides of the headliner. Do not attempt
to remove or dismantle the steering wheel.
Do not touch the individual components
directly after the system has been triggered,
because there is a danger of burns.
In the event of malfunctions, deactivation, or
triggering of the airbag restraint system, have
the testing, repair, removal, and disposal of air-
bag generators carried out only by a BMW cen-
ter or a workshop that works according to BMW
repair procedures with appropriately trained
personnel and has the required explosives
licenses. Otherwise unprofessional attempts to
service the system could lead to failure in an
emergency or undesired airbag triggering,
either of which could result in personal injury.<
Warnings and information on the airbags is also
provided on the sun visors.
Automatic deactivation of front
passenger airbags
The occupation of the seat is detected by eval-
uating the impression on the occupied seat sur-
face of the front passenger seat. The system
correspondingly activates or deactivates the
front, knee and side airbags on the front pas-
senger side.
The current status of the front passenger
airbags, i.e. deactivated or activated, is
indicated by the indicator lamp over the interior
rearview mirror, refer to Operating state of front
passenger airbags below.<
Before transporting a child in the front
passenger seat, read the safety informa-
tion and follow the instructions under Trans-
porting children safely, refer to page 57.
The front, knee and side airbags on the front
passenger side can be deactivated for teenag-
ers and adults in certain sitting positions; the
indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags
lights up when this occurs. In these cases,
change the sitting position so that the front pas-
senger airbags are activated and the indicator
lamp goes out. If the desired status cannot be
produced by changing the sitting position,
transport the corresponding person in the rear
seat.
Do not fit seat covers, seat cushion padding,
beaded mats or other items onto the front pas-
senger seat unless they are specifically recom-
mended by BMW. Do not place objects under
the seat which could press against the seat
from below. Otherwise, a correct evaluation of
the occupied seat surface cannot be ensured.<
Operating state of front passenger
airbags
The illustration here shows a possible arrange-
ment in the Coupe. With some vehicle equip-
ment packages or in the Convertible, the
arrangement of the switches and indicator
lamps may differ somewhat.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
96
The indicator lamp for the front passenger air-
bags indicates the operating status of the front,
knee and side airbags on the front passenger
side depending on whether the seat is occu-
pied. The indicator lamp shows whether the
front passenger airbags are activated or deacti-
vated.
> The indicator lamp lights up when a child in
a child restraint system intended for the
purpose is properly detected on the seat.
The front, knee and side airbags on the front
passenger side are deactivated.
Most child seats are detected by the sys-
tem. Especially the child seats required
by the NHTSA at the time the vehicle is manu-
factured. After installing a child seat, make sure
that the indicator lamp for the front passenger
airbags lights up. This indicates that the child
seat has been detected and the front passenger
airbags are not activated.<
> The indicator lamp does not light up when,
for example, a correctly seated person of
sufficient height is detected on the seat.
The front, knee and side airbags on the front
passenger side are activated.
> The indicator lamp does not light up when
the seat is empty.
But the front, knee and side airbags on the
front passenger side are still deactivated.
Operational readiness of airbag system
From radio readiness, refer to page 59, the
warning lamp lights up briefly, indicating the
operational readiness of the entire airbag sys-
tem and the safety belt tensioners.
Airbag system malfunction
> Warning lamp does not light up as of radio
readiness.
> Warning lamp lights up continuously.
Have the airbag system checked immedi-
ately in case of a malfunction; otherwise,
there is a danger that the airbag system may not
respond in the expected manner in an accident
despite an impact of corresponding intensity.<
Convertible: rollover
protection system
The rollover protection system is automatically
activated in the event of an accident or a critical
driving situation, extreme inclination on the lon-
gitudinal axis, or loss of ground contact. The
rollover bars located behind the rear head
restraints are deployed within fractions of a sec-
ond.
As a supplement to the rollover bar integrated
into the windshield frame, the rollover protec-
tion system ensures that all vehicle occupants
have the necessary headroom.
Always keep the path of movement of the
rollover protection system clear.
In less severe accidents, you are protected by
the fastened safety belt and, depending on the
severity of the accident, the belt tensioner and
the multistage airbag restraint system.<
Lowering
If the rollover protection system experienced no
impact after automatic activation, then it can be
lowered again. No tools are necessary for this
purpose.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
97
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
1. Press the release backward and hold in that
position.
2. Press the rollover protection unit halfway
down from above.
3. Let go of the release.
4. Press the rollover protection unit down until
it snaps into place.
5. Use the same procedure for the second roll-
over protection unit.
Have the rollover protection system checked
after unexpected triggering.
Never move the convertible top when the
rollover protection system is raised.
No changes of any nature may be made to the
individual components of the rollover protec-
tion system and wiring.
Work on the rollover protection system may
only be performed at a BMW center.
Unprofessional attempts to service the system
can lead to failure or malfunction.
For a system check and to ensure long-term
functioning, you must comply with the mainte-
nance intervals of the service requirements,
refer to page 78.<
Head-Up Display*
The concept
With the Head-Up Display, important informa-
tion is projected into the driver's field of view,
e.g. navigation instructions. This enables you to
absorb this information without looking away
from the road.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
1 Navigation instructions
2 Display
> Cruise control
> Active cruise control
3 Speed
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
98
Selecting displays
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Display settings" and press the
controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Head-Up Display" is
selected and press the controller.
6. Change into the second field from the top.
Turn the controller until "Head-Up Display"
is selected and press the controller.
7. Select desired information of Head-Up Dis-
play.
8. Press the controller.
The information is shown on the Head-
Up Display.
The settings are stored for the remote key cur-
rently in use.
Setting brightness
The brightness of the display is automatically
adapted to the ambient lighting conditions.
However, you can change the base setting.
With the low beams switched on, the brightness
can also be adjusted with the knurled wheel of
the instrument lighting.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Display settings" and press the
controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Head-Up Display" is
selected and press the controller.
6. Change into the second field from the top.
Turn the controller until "Brightness" is
selected and press the controller.
7. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Notes
The visibility of the displays in the Head-Up Dis-
play is influenced by:
> Sunglasses with certain polarization filters
> Certain sitting positions
> Objects on the cover of the Head-Up Dis-
play
> Wet road surface and unfavorable lighting
conditions
If the image is distorted, please have the base
setting checked at a BMW center.
Specialized windshield
The windshield is a part of the system. The
shape of the windshield complies with the
requirements of the Head-Up Display to enable
a precise display. A film in the windshield pre-
vents double images from being displayed.
Windshield replacement should be carried out
by a BMW center or a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with cor-
respondingly trained personnel.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
99
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Care instructions
You can find everything you need to know on
this topic by consulting the Caring for your vehi-
cle brochure.
Only clean the cover of the Head-Up Dis-
play with a soft, lint-free cloth or with a
display cleaning cloth, otherwise damage may
result.<
BMW Night Vision*
The concept
BMW Night Vision is a driver assistance system
that is designed to provide enhanced vision for
certain objects at night. This can be especially
helpful for detecting people and larger animals.
When objects are detected, the driver may be
able to take appropriate action sooner. For
example, the driver may identify and detect the
presence of persons or animals in the road
ahead or off to the sides and can be more alert,
slow down or stop, blow the horn etc. The driver
can decide which actions are appropriate and
then react accordingly.
A certain area in front of the vehicle is viewed by
an infrared camera and a generated image is
shown on the Control Display. The resulting
thermal image shows the relative heat radiation
of the objects present in the camera's field of
view. Warmer objects appear brighter and
cooler objects appear darker. Contrast is
dependent on the temperature difference
between the objects and the background and
on the amount of heat radiation of the object
itself. As a result, it is quite possible that a per-
son is not continually recognizable as a person
in shape, since the thermal radiation can be
affected by different clothing which blocks heat
loss. Objects with little temperature difference
to the surrounding area, or little heat radiation
are less noticeable, for example in cold weather.
Any improvement in detection depends on
many factors such as the object size and tem-
perature compared to the surroundings, or
other nearby objects, the visual recognition
skills of the driver, weather conditions, and
other factors.
Driving hints
With the system active, periodically but briefly,
glance at the thermal image on the Control Dis-
play to notice objects that could be people or
larger animals. The glance should be similar to
glancing at the rear view mirror. Do not stare at
the image for long periods while driving, as this
will remove attention from the road. If you notice
an object of interest ahead, be prepared to slow
down or stop, blow the horn, or take other
appropriate action.
System limits
The system is designed to supplement but not
replace forward vision through the windshield.
The driver is responsible for safe driving at
night. BMW Night Vision is not designed to be
used as a continuous viewing window for driv-
ing at night.
No system, no matter how sophisticated, can
operate without limitations. BMW Night Vision
operation is subject to physical and environ-
mental limitations that will reduce the ability of
the system to detect and display a clear thermal
image. Some of the situations in which these
limitations can occur are:
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
100
> on steep hilltops or depressions and in tight
curves
> in tunnels, as the contrast is inherently low
> when the camera lens is dirty
> in dense fog, heavy rain or snowfall
> when displaying very hot objects such as
transformers, car exhausts etc.
> when the image briefly freezes during nor-
mal system adjustment.
BMW Night Vision's potential benefits
can be limited by the driving style of the
driver, the size and relative temperature of the
detected objects, dirt or contamination on the
camera lens, adverse weather like snow, rain or
fog, and other factors not mentioned here. It will
always be the driver's responsibility to drive at a
speed and in a manner that recognizes potential
hazards and adjust accordingly.
BMW Night Vision is not a substitute or replace-
ment for driver responsibility or for accommo-
dating the visibility conditions and the traffic sit-
uation. The forward view illuminated by the
headlamps must always be the basis for making
safe driving decisions, otherwise a safety risk
will result.<
Activating BMW Night Vision
1. Turn the light switch to position 2 or 3, refer
to page 102.
2. With low beams switched on:
> Press the button. Depending on the
vehicle's equipment, the location of the
button may differ somewhat.
> Press one of the programmable buttons
on the steering wheel, refer to page 55.
The image will be displayed on the Control Dis-
play after a few seconds. Depending on the last
mode selected, either the normal or full screen
image will be displayed.
Due to the system's need to adjust periodically,
a still image is displayed at certain intervals for
fractions of a second. This is normal and not an
indication of a problem.
To prevent driving without headlamps, at a
speed of more than approx. 3 mph/5 km/h and
when dark, the thermal image on the Control
Display is only shown when the low beams are
on.
Deactivating BMW Night Vision
> Press the button.
> Press the button on the steering wheel.
> Press the button.
> Via iDrive, refer to Selecting settings.
Selecting settings
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Activate BMW Night Vision.
2. Press the controller to display the menu
items.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
101
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
3. Select the menu item and press the control-
ler:
> "Night Vision off":
Deactivate BMW Night Vision.
> "Zoom":
At higher speeds, the image is zoomed
in.
> "Curve mode":
Depending on the steering angle and
other parameters, the image sections
follow the course of the road to some
degree.
> "Full screen":
The image is shown on the entire Con-
trol Display.
> "Contrast":
The contrast of the screen can be
adjusted.
> "Brightness":
The brightness of the screen can be
adjusted.
"Curve mode" can only be activated with
the "Zoom" function switched on. With
"Full screen" activated, "Curve mode" and
"Zoom" cannot be selected.<
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
To exit the menu:
The image will automatically disappear after
approx. 5 seconds.
Cleaning camera
The function of the camera may be affected by
heavy rain and fog, dirt, snow or ice on the lens.
When this occurs, the displayed image on the
Control Display may become gray.
To minimize icing, the camera lens is automati-
cally heated. However, it may be necessary to
clean the camera lens manually under severe
weather conditions. When doing so, cautiously
remove any debris, ice or snow. To avoid dam-
age to the lens, do not use sharp or abrasive
instruments to clean ice, snow, or dirt off the
lens.
When the windshield is cleaned with the head-
lamps on, the camera lens area is automatically
sprayed as well. Refer to page 66.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Lamps
102
Lamps
Parking lamps/low beams
0 Lights off and daytime running lamps
*
1 Parking lamps and daytime running lamps
*
2 Low beams
3 Automatic headlamp control,
daytime run-
ning lamps
*
and Adaptive Head Light
*
Parking lamps
In switch position 1, the front, rear and side
vehicle lighting is switched on. You can use the
parking lamps for parking.
The parking lamps drain the battery. Do
not leave them switched on for long peri-
ods of time, otherwise it may no longer be pos-
sible to start the engine. It is preferable to
switch on the roadside parking lamps on one
side, refer to page 104.<
Low beams
The low beams light up when the light switch is
in position 2 and the ignition is on.
If the light switch remains in position 2, the
exterior lamps are switched off automatically
when the driver's door is opened while the igni-
tion is off.
Switch on the parking lamps if required as
described under Parking lamps.
Automatic headlamp control
In switch position 3, the system activates the
low beams and switches them on or off in
response to changes in ambient light condi-
tions, for instance, in a tunnel, at dawn and dusk
and in case of precipitation. Adaptive Head
Light
*
is active. The LED next to the symbol is
illuminated when the low beams are on.
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on.
The low beams remain on independent of
the ambient lighting conditions when you
switch on the fog lamps.<
If desired, the light switch can be left in posi-
tion 3. The exterior lighting is automatically
switched off after switching off the vehicle.
The automatic headlamp control cannot
serve as a substitute for your personal
judgment in determining when the lamps
should be switched on in response to ambient
lighting conditions. For example, the sensors
cannot detect fog of hazy weather. To avoid
safety risks, you should always switch on the
low beams manually under these conditions.<
Pathway lighting
When you activate the headlamp flasher after
parking the vehicle and switching off the lamps,
the low beams will come on for a brief period.
You can set the duration or deactivate the func-
tion via iDrive.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
103
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Lighting" is selected and
press the controller.
6. Select "Pathway lighting" and press the
controller.
7. Turn the controller to select the desired
duration.
8. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Daytime running lamps*
If desired, the light switch can remain in posi-
tions 0, 1 or 3.
In positions 0 and 3 the exterior lighting is auto-
matically switched off after the vehicle is
switched off. In position 1 the parking lamps
light up after the ignition is switched off.
Switch on the parking lamps if required as
described under Parking lamps.
Activating/deactivating daytime
running lamps*
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Lighting" is selected and
press the controller.
6. Select "Daytime running lamps" and press
the controller.
The daytime running lamps are
switched on.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Adaptive Head Light*
The concept
Adaptive Head Light is a variable headlamp
control system that enables better illumination
of the road surface. Depending on the steering
angle and other parameters, the light from the
headlamp follows the course of the road.
Activating Adaptive Head Light
In switch position 3, the Adaptive Head Light is
active and the automatic headlamp control is
switched on, refer to page 102.
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adaptive
Head Light is not active when driving in reverse
and points toward the passenger side when the
vehicle is stopped.
Malfunction
The LED next to the symbol for automatic head-
lamp control flashes. The Adaptive Head Light
is malfunctioning or has failed. Have the system
checked as soon as possible.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Lamps
104
High beams/
roadside parking lamps
1 High beams
2 Headlamp flasher
3 Roadside parking lamps
Roadside parking lamps, left or right*
You also enjoy the option of lighting up just one
side of your vehicle when parking:
Switching on
After parking the vehicle, press the lever up or
down beyond the resistance point, arrow 3.
The roadside parking lamps drain the bat-
tery. Do not leave them switched on for
long periods of time, otherwise it may no longer
be possible to start the engine.<
Switching off
Briefly press the lever in the opposite direction
up to the resistance point, arrow 3.
Fog lamps
The parking lamps or low beams must be
switched on for the fog lamps to operate.
The green indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up when the fog lamps are
switched on.
The fog lamps are switched off whenever the
high beams are switched on.
If the automatic headlamp control is acti-
vated, the low beams will come on auto-
matically when you switch on the fog lamps.<
Instrument lighting
You can control the lighting intensity by using
the knurled wheel.
Interior lamps
Control of the interior lamps, footwell lamps,
door entry lighting, courtesy lamps
*
and sill
panel lighting
*
is automatic.
With the courtesy lamps, LED lights are located
in the door handles to illuminate the exterior
area before the doors.
To protect the battery, all lamps in the
vehicle are switched off approx. 15 min-
utes after radio readiness is switched off, refer
to Start/Stop button on page 59.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
105
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Switching interior lamps on and off
manually
Press button 1.
If the interior lamps, footwell lamps, door entry
lighting, courtesy lamps and sill panel lighting
are to remain switched off continually, press the
button for approx. 3 seconds.
Reading lamps
The reading lamps are beside the interior lamp:
You can turn them on and off using buttons 2
located next to the lamps.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Climate
106
Climate
Automatic climate control
1 Air directed toward the windshield and
side windows
2 Air for the upper body area, refer to
Ventilation on page 109
3 Air to footwell
4 Temperature, left side of passenger
compartment
5 Maximum cooling
6 Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
7 Air volume, manual
8 Switching off automatic climate control
9 Switching cooling function on and off
manually
10 Temperature, right side of passenger
compartment
11 Residual heat mode
12 AUTO program
13 AUC automatic recirculated-air control/
recirculated air mode
14 LED for parked car ventilation
15 Rear window defroster
16 Air grill for interior temperature sensor –
please keep clear and unobstructed
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
107
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
The current setting for air distribution is dis-
played on the Control Display.
A congenial climate
The AUTO program offers the optimum air dis-
tribution and air volume for virtually all condi-
tions, refer to AUTO program below. Now you
only need to select an interior temperature that
you find pleasant.
The following sections contain more detailed
information on the available setting options.
Most settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use, also refer to Personal Profile
settings on page 29.
AUTO program
The AUTO program handles the
adjustment of air volume and air
distribution to the windshield and
side windows, in the direction of the upper body
and in the footwell. It also adapts your instruc-
tions for the temperature to outside influences
throughout the year.
The cooling is switched on automatically with
the AUTO program. At the same time, a con-
densation sensor controls the program in such
a way that window condensation is prevented
as much as possible.
Intensity of AUTO program
To meet your individual needs, you can
increase or decrease the intensity of the auto-
matic climate control.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the left to open "Cli-
mate".
3. Select "Automatic programs" and press the
controller.
4. Select the desired intensity and press the
controller.
The marked intensity of the automatic
program is switched on.
Convertible program*
When the convertible top is opened, the con-
vertible program can also be selected. In the
convertible program, the automatic climate
control is optimized for driving with the convert-
ible top open. In addition, the air volume is
increased as the speed increases.
If the convertible program has been selected,
it is automatically active every time the top is
opened.
The effect of the convertible program can
be greatly enhanced if the wind deflector
is installed.<
Temperature
Set the desired temperature indi-
vidually on the driver's and front
passenger side.
The automatic climate control
achieves this temperature as quickly as possi-
ble at any time of year, if necessary with the
maximum cooling or heating capacity, and then
keeps it constant.
When switching between different tem-
perature settings in rapid succession, the
automatic climate control does not have suffi-
cient time to achieve the set temperature.<
In the highest setting you activate the maximum
heating output, regardless of the outside tem-
perature.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Climate
108
Adapting temperature in upper body
region
1. Open the start menu.
2. Open "Climate".
3. Select "Vent settings" and press the con-
troller.
4. Select the field by moving the controller and
adjust the temperature by turning the con-
troller.
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
Quickly remove ice and condensa-
tion from the windshield and front
side windows.
To do this, also switch on the cooling function.
Rear window defroster
The rear window defroster
switches off automatically after a
certain amount of time.
Convertible: the rear window defroster is only
activated when the rear window is closed.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, upper
wires are used as an antenna and are not part of
the rear window defroster.
Air volume, manual
You can adjust the air volume by
turning. You can reactivate the
automatic mode for the air volume
with the AUTO button.
Manual air distribution
1. Open the start menu.
2. Open "Climate".
3. Select "Vent settings" and press the con-
troller.
The driver's and front passenger side can
be adjusted separately with the fields on the
right or left side.
4. Select the driver's or front passenger side if
necessary.
Move the controller to the right or left
repeatedly until the driver's side or front
passenger side is selected.
5. Select the desired field by moving the con-
troller.
6. Turn the controller to adjust the air distribu-
tion.
Driver's side:
1 Air directed toward the windshield and side
windows
2 Air for the upper body
3 Air to footwell
Front passenger side:
4 Air for the upper body
5 Air to footwell
Pressing the AUTO button cancels the air
distribution settings via iDrive and vice
versa.<
Switching cooling function on and off
The cooling function cools and
dehumidifies the incoming air
before reheating it as needed
according to the temperature setting. Depend-
ing on the weather, the windshield may fog over
briefly when the engine is started.
The cooling function is switched on automati-
cally with the AUTO program. The passenger
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
109
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
compartment can only be cooled with the
engine running.
Maximum cooling
Maximally cooled air is obtained as
quickly as possible from an outside
temperature above approx. 327/
06 and with the engine running.
The automatic climate control changes over to
the lowest temperature and switches into the
recirculated-air mode. The maximum air vol-
ume only flows out of the vents for the upper
body. It is therefore necessary for these vents to
be open for maximum cooling.
AUC Automatic recirculated-air
control/recirculated-air mode
You can respond to unpleasant
odors or pollutants in the immedi-
ate environment by temporarily
suspending the supply of outside air. The sys-
tem then recirculates the air currently within the
vehicle. In AUC mode, a sensor detects pollut-
ants in the outside air and controls the shut-off
automatically.
Press the button repeatedly to run through the
following control sequence:
> LED off: outside air flows into the vehicle
continuously.
> Right LED on, AUC mode: the system
detects pollutants in the outside air and
responds by blocking the supply of outside
air when required.
> Left LED on, recirculated-air mode: the
supply of outside air into the vehicle is shut
off continuously.
If condensation starts to form on the
inside window surfaces during operation
in the recirculated-air mode, you should switch
it off while also increasing the air volume as
required.
The recirculated-air mode should not be used
over a longer period of time, as the air quality
inside the vehicle deteriorates continuously.<
Residual heat
The heat stored in the engine is
used to heat the passenger com-
partment, e.g. while stopped at a
school to pick up a child.
The function can be switched on when the fol-
lowing conditions are met:
> up to 15 minutes after switching off the
engine
> engine at operating temperature
> sufficient battery voltage
> outside temperature below 777/256
The LED lights up when the function is
switched on.
With the ignition lock at radio readiness or
higher the interior temperature, the air volume
and the air distribution can be set.
Switching automatic climate control on
and off
The air volume, the heater and the
cooling function are all switched
off.
You can restart the automatic cli-
mate control by pressing any of its buttons
except the REST button.
Ventilation
1 Knurled wheels for smoothly opening and
closing vent outlets
2 Levers for changing the airflow direction
Do not drop any foreign objects into the
vent outlets; otherwise, they could be cat-
apulted outwards and cause injuries.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Climate
110
Ventilation for cooling
Adjust the vent outlets to direct the flow of cool
air in your direction, for instance, if the interior
has become too warm, etc.
Draft-free ventilation
Set the vent outlets so that the air flows past
you and is not directed straight at you.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
The microfilter removes dust and pollen from
the incoming air. The activated-charcoal filter
provides additional protection by filtering gas-
eous pollutants from the outside air. Your BMW
center replaces this combined filter as a stan-
dard part of your scheduled maintenance.
You can have more detailed information shown
on the Control Display, refer to page 78.
Parked car ventilation
The concept
The parked car ventilation blows air into the
passenger compartment to lower interior tem-
peratures.
It is ready to use in the parked-car mode at any
outside temperature.
You can set two different times for the system
to start. The parked car ventilation can also be
switched on and off directly. It remains
switched on for 30 minutes.
Since the system uses a substantial amount of
electrical current, you should refrain from acti-
vating it twice in succession without allowing
the battery to be recharged in normal operation
between uses.
The air emerges through the upper body region
vent outlets in the instrument panel. Therefore,
please open the vent outlets.
The parked car ventilation system is operated
via iDrive.
Switching on and off directly
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the left to open "Cli-
mate".
3. Select "Parked car operation" and press the
controller.
4. Select "Automatic ventilation" and press
the controller.
5. Select "Parked car ventilation" and press
the controller.
The parked car ventilation is switched on.
The symbol on the display of the automatic
climate control flashes.
Preselecting activation times
1. Open the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the left to open "Cli-
mate".
3. Select "Parked car operation" and press the
controller.
4. Select "Activation time" and press the con-
troller.
5. Move the controller to the left or right to
select "Timer 1" or "Timer 2".
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
111
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
6. Select the time and press the controller.
The first time setting is selected.
7. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
8. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The next adjustment is selected.
9. Make the remaining adjustments. After the
last adjustment, the time is stored.
Activating timer
Move the controller to the left or right to select
"Timer 1" or "Timer 2" and then press the con-
troller.
The switch-on time is activated.
The symbol on the display of the automatic
climate control lights up.
The symbol on the display of the automatic
climate control flashes when the parked car
ventilation has switched on.
The parked car ventilation is only avail-
able for activation within the subsequent
24 hours. After that, the time must be reacti-
vated.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
112
Practical interior accessories
Integrated universal remote
control*
The concept
The integrated universal remote control can
replace as many as three hand-held transmit-
ters for various remote-controlled accessories,
such as garage and gate or lighting systems.
The integrated universal remote control regis-
ters and stores signals from the original hand-
held transmitters.
The signal of an original hand-held transmitter
can be programmed on one of the three mem-
ory buttons 1. After this, the programmed
memory button 1 will operate the system in
question. The LED 2 flashes to confirm trans-
mission of the signal.
If you sell your vehicle one day, delete the saved
programs beforehand for your own security,
refer to page 113.
To prevent possible damage or injury,
before programming or using the inte-
grated universal remote control, always inspect
the immediate area to make certain that no peo-
ple, animals or objects are within the travel
range of the device. Also, comply with the
safety precautions of the original hand-held
transmitter.<
Checking compatibility
If you see this symbol on the packaging
or in the manual supplied with the orig-
inal hand-held transmitter, it is safe to
assume that it is compatible with the integrated
universal remote control.
If you have additional questions, please
contact your BMW center or call:
1-800-355-3515.
Information is also provided on the Internet at:
www.bmwusa.com or
www.homelink.com.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of
Johnson Controls, Inc.<
Programming
1 Memory buttons
2 LED
Fixed-code hand-held transmitters
1. Switch on ignition, refer to page 59.
2. When using for the first time: press the left
and right-hand memory button 1 for approx.
20 seconds until the LED 2 flashes quickly.
All stored programs are deleted.
3. Hold the original hand-held transmitter at a
distance of approx. 4 in/10 cm to 12 in/
30 cm from the memory buttons 1.
The required distance between the
hand-held transmitter and the mem-
ory buttons 1 depends on the particular
system of the original hand-held transmitter
used.<
4. Simultaneously press the transmit key on
the original hand-held transmitter and the
desired memory button 1 on the integrated
universal remote control. The LED 2 flashes
slowly at first. As soon as the LED 2 flashes
rapidly, release both buttons. If the LED 2
does not flash rapidly after approx. 15 sec-
onds, alter the distance and repeat the step.
5. To program other original hand-held trans-
mitters, repeat steps 3 and 4.
The corresponding memory button 1 is now
programmed with the signal of the original
hand-held transmitter.
You can operate the device when the engine is
running or when the ignition is switched on.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
113
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
If the device fails to function even after
repeated programming, check whether
the original hand-held transmitter uses an alter-
nating-code system. To do so, either read the
instructions for the original hand-held transmit-
ter or hold down the programmed memory
button 1 of the integrated universal remote
control. If the LED 2 on the integrated universal
remote control flashes rapidly for a short time
and then remains lit for approx. 2 seconds, this
indicates that the original hand-held transmitter
uses an alternating-code system. In the case of
an alternating-code system, program the mem-
ory buttons 1 as described at Alternating-code
hand-held transmitters.<
Alternating-code hand-held
transmitters
To program the integrated universal remote
control, consult the operating instructions for
the equipment to be set. You will find informa-
tion there on the possibilities for synchroniza-
tion.
When programming hand-held transmitters
that employ an alternating code, please observe
the following supplementary instructions:
Programming will be easier with the aid of
a second person.<
1. Park your vehicle within the range of the
remote-controlled equipment.
2. Program the integrated universal remote
control as described above in Fixed-code
hand-held transmitters.
3. Locate the button on the receiver of the
device to be set, e.g. on the drive unit.
4. Press the button on the receiver of the
equipment to be set. After step 4, you have
approx. 30 seconds for step 5.
5. Press the programmed memory button 1
of the integrated universal remote control
three times.
The corresponding memory button 1 is now
programmed with the signal of the original
hand-held transmitter.
If you have any additional questions,
please contact your BMW center.<
Deleting stored programs
Press the left and right-hand memory button 1
for approx. 20 seconds until the LED 2 flashes.
All stored programs are deleted.
Programs cannot be deleted individually.
Glove compartment
Opening
Press the button. The glove compartment
opens automatically and the lamps come on.
To prevent injury in the event of an acci-
dent while the vehicle is being driven,
close the glove compartment immediately after
use.<
Closing
Fold the cover up.
Rechargeable flashlight*
The flashlight is located on the left side of the
glove compartment.
The flashlight can remain there continuously.
Remove the flashlight from the socket when
needed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
114
Be sure that the flashlight is switched off
when it is inserted into its socket. Failure
to comply with this precaution could lead to
overcharging and damage.<
Center armrest
A storage compartment is located in the arm-
rest between the front seats. This compartment
is integrated into the central locking system and
can also be locked separately using the hotel
function, refer to page 33.
To open the cover:
Pull the left button. The cover opens and can be
folded upward.
Depending on the version, the storage com-
partment can be equipped with a correspond-
ing cradle
*
for the telephone or mobile phone.
Connection for external audio device
A connection for an external audio device is
located in the storage compartment. You can,
for example, connect a CD player or an MP3
player, and play the sound via the vehicle loud-
speakers, refer to page 171
Adjusting height
The center armrest can be set in two positions.
Pull the right button:
Move the armrest upward or downward and
lock it in the desired position.
Storage compartments
Storage compartment behind center
armrest
To open, raise the cover at the left or right edge.
The compartment contains the cup holder
and
the lock for the hotel function, refer to page 33.
Other compartments and nets
Other compartments are provided in the doors
as well as in the front center console
*
.
Ticket pockets are located in the sun visors.
Storage nets are located on the backrests of the
front seats and in the passenger footwell
*
.
To prevent the risk of injury during an
accident, do not stow hard or sharp-
edged items in the nets.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
115
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Another storage space is located in the luggage
compartment in the right side panel. If you wish,
this is also suitable to store the onboard docu-
mentation.
Coupe: clothes hooks
To fold down, press at the top edge.
When hanging clothing on the hooks,
ensure that it will not obstruct the driver's
vision. Do not hang heavy objects on the hooks.
If you do so, they could cause personal injury to
occupants during braking or evasive maneu-
vers.<
Cup holders
Do not place containers made of glass in
the cup holders. This would lead to an
increased risk of injury in the event of an acci-
dent. Do not force unsuitable containers into
the cup holders, as otherwise damage can
result.<
The compartment of the rear center console
contains a built-in cup holder and a removable
one.
The removable cup holder can be inserted into
the side of the center console.
Ashtray
Opening
Press the trim strip of the cover.
Emptying
Press the opened cover beyond the resistance
point, refer to arrow: the ashtray lifts up for
removal.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
116
Cigarette lighter
Press in the lighter with the engine running or
the ignition switched on.
The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops
back out.
Hold or touch the hot cigarette lighter by
the knob only. Holding or touching it in
other areas could result in burns.
Always take along the remote control when you
leave the vehicle; otherwise, children could, for
example, use the lighter and burn themselves.<
Connecting electrical devices
Socket
With the engine running or the ignition switched
on, the cigarette lighter socket can be used as a
power outlet for hand flashlights, car vacuum
cleaners, etc., with power ratings of up to
approx. 200 W at 12 V. Avoid damaging the
socket by inserting plugs of different shapes or
sizes.
In front passenger footwell
Access to the socket:
Fold open the cover.
Ski bag*
It permits safe and clean transport of up to two
pairs of standard skis or one snowboard.
You can use the ski bag to stow skis up to 6.9 ft/
2.10 m long.
Loading
1. Press the button downward and pull the
filler element forward.
2. Extend the ski bag between the front seats.
The zipper gives you easy access to stowed
items and facilitates drying of the ski bag.
3. Press the button in the luggage compart-
ment.
4. Open the loading flap and use the magnetic
holder to secure it to the rear panel.
To stow the ski bag, perform the above steps in
reverse order.
Only stow clean skis in the ski bag. Wrap sharp
edges so that no damage occurs.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
117
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Securing cargo
After loading, secure the ski bag and its con-
tents. To do so, tighten the retaining belt at the
buckle.
Secure the ski bag in this way. If you fail to
do so, it could move around and endanger
occupants during braking or evasive maneu-
vers.
To refit the filler element, insert the two tabs at
the bottom into the strip and press the filler ele-
ment back into place. Make sure that you do not
damage the rear seat upholstery.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Driving tips
This section is designed to provide you
with extra support by supplying information
useful in dealing with specific driving
and operating conditions.
Driving tips
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving
120
Things to remember when driving
Breaking-in
Moving parts need time to adjust to one
another. To ensure that your vehicle continues
to provide optimized economy of operation
throughout an extended service life, we request
that you devote careful attention to the follow-
ing section.
Engine and differential
Always obey all official speed limits.
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Drive at changing engine and driving speeds,
however do not exceed 4,500 rpm or 100 mph/
160 km/h.
Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the
transmission's kick-down mode during these
initial miles.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be
increased.
SMG Sequential Manual Transmission
Do not use the acceleration assistant during the
break-in period, refer to page 65.
Tires
Due to technical factors associated with their
manufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac-
tion potential until after an initial break-in
period. Therefore, drive reservedly during the
first 200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
Brakes require an initial break-in period of
approx. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized
contact and wear patterns between brake pads
and rotors. Drive in a reserved manner during
this break-in period.
Clutch
The function of the clutch is only at its opti-
mized level after a distance driven of approx.
300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period,
engage the clutch gently.
Following part replacement
Observe the break-in instructions again if com-
ponents mentioned above must be replaced
after subsequent driving operation.
General driving notes
Closing luggage compartment lid
Only drive with the luggage compartment
lid completely closed, otherwise exhaust
can penetrate into the passenger compart-
ment.<
If special circumstances should make it abso-
lutely necessary to operate the vehicle with the
luggage compartment lid open:
1. Coupe: close both windows and the glass
sunroof.
Convertible: with closed top, close all win-
dows.
2. Increase the air volume of the automatic cli-
mate control to a high level, refer to
page 108.
Hot exhaust system
As in all vehicles, extremely high temper-
atures are generated in the exhaust sys-
tem. Do not remove the heat shields installed
adjacent to it, and never apply undercoating to
them. When driving, standing at idle and while
parking, take care to avoid possible contact
between the hot exhaust system and any highly
flammable materials such as hay, leaves, grass,
etc. Such contact could lead to a fire, and with it
the risk of serious property damage as well as
personal injury. Do not touch hot exhaust tail
pipes. Otherwise there is a risk of burns.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Driving tips
121
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Mobile communications devices in
vehicle
BMW advises against using mobile com-
munications devices, e.g. mobile phones,
inside the vehicle without a direct connection to
an external antenna. Otherwise, the vehicle
electronics and mobile communications device
can interfere with each other. In addition, there
is no assurance that the radiation emitted dur-
ing transmission will be conveyed out of the
vehicle interior.<
Hydroplaning
When driving on wet or slushy roads,
reduce road speed. If you do not, a wedge
of water can form between tires and road sur-
face. This phenomenon is referred to as hydro-
planing, and is characterized by a partial or
complete loss of contact between the tires and
the road surface, ultimately undermining your
ability to steer and brake the vehicle.<
The risk of hydroplaning increases as the tread
depth of the tires decreases, also refer to Mini-
mum tire tread on page 203.
Driving through water
Do not drive through water on the road if it
is deeper than 1 ft/30 cm, and then only at
walking speed at the most. Otherwise, the vehi-
cle's engine, the electrical systems and the
transmission may be damaged.<
Using handbrake on inclines
On inclines, do not hold the vehicle with
the clutch; use the handbrake. Otherwise,
greater clutch wear will result.<
SMG Sequential Manual Transmission
Start off quickly on slopes. Do not hold
the vehicle on a hill by applying the throt-
tle, but engage the handbrake instead. Other-
wise, overheating can occur in the transmission
region.<
Starting assistant
The starting assistant enables you to start off
conveniently on slopes. The handbrake is not
required for this purpose.
1. Hold the vehicle with the footbrake.
2. Release the footbrake and drive off quickly.
The starting assistant holds the vehicle
for approx. 2 seconds after releasing the
footbrake. Depending on the load, the vehicle
may also roll back slightly during this time.
After releasing the footbrake, drive off quickly,
otherwise the starting assistant no longer holds
the vehicle after approx. 2 seconds and it
begins to roll back.<
Braking safely
Your BMW is equipped with ABS as a standard
feature. In situations that require it, it is best to
brake with full force. Since the vehicle maintains
steering responsiveness, you can still avoid
possible obstacles with a minimum of steering
effort.
Pulsation at the brake pedal combines with
sounds from the hydraulic circuits to indicate to
the driver that ABS is in its active mode.
Do not drive with your foot resting on the
brake pedal. Even light but consistent
pedal pressure can lead to high temperatures,
brake wear and possibly even brake failure.<
Driving in wet conditions
When driving on wet roads or in heavy rain, it is
a good idea to apply light pressure to the brake
pedal every few miles. Monitor traffic conditions
to ensure that this maneuver does not endan-
ger other road users. The heat generated in this
process helps dry the pads and rotors to ensure
that full braking efficiency will then be available
when you need it.
Hills
To prevent overheating and thus reduced
efficiency of the brake system, downshift
to a gear in which only minimal brake applica-
tions are needed when descending long or
steep downhill stretches. Even light but consis-
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving
122
tent pressure on the brake pedal can lead to
high temperatures, brake wear and possibly
even brake failure.<
The braking effect of the engine can be further
increased by downshifting, if necessary all the
way down into first gear. This strategy helps
you avoid placing excessive loads on the brake
system. For information on downshifting in the
manual mode of the automatic transmission,
refer to page 64.
Do not drive with the clutch depressed, in
idle or with the engine switched off, other-
wise there will be no engine braking action or
support of the braking force and steering.
Never allow floor mats, carpets or any other
objects to protrude into the area of movement
of the pedals and impair their operation.<
Corrosion on brake rotors
When the vehicle is driven only occasionally,
during extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all, and in operating conditions where
brake applications are less frequent, there is an
increased tendency for corrosion to form on
rotors, while contaminants accumulate on the
brake pads. This occurs because the minimum
pressure which must be exerted by the pads
during brake applications to clean the rotors is
not reached.
Should corrosion form on the brake rotors, the
brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating
effect that even extended application will fail to
cure.
When vehicle is parked
Condensation forms in the automatic climate
control during operation, and then exits under
the vehicle. Traces of condensed water under
the vehicle are therefore normal.
Before driving into a car wash
To prevent the exterior mirrors on this vehicle
from being damaged, always fold them in by
hand before entering an automatic car wash.
General information on the care and mainte-
nance of your BMW is contained in the Caring
for your vehicle brochure.
Automatic transmission
Insert the remote control into the ignition lock.
The engine can be switched off in selector lever
position N. Also refer to page 38.
Cargo loading
To avoid loading the tires beyond their
approved carrying capacity, never over-
load the vehicle. Overloading can lead to over-
heating and increases the rate at which damage
develops inside the tires. The ultimate result
can assume the form of a sudden blow-out.<
Determining loading limit
1. Locate the following statement on your
vehicle's placard
*
:
The combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
YYY lbs. or XXX kg, as otherwise the vehicle
may be damaged and unstable driving con-
ditions may result.<
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX lbs. or YYY kg.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the XXX amount equals
800 lbs. and there will be four 150-lb. pas-
sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail-
able cargo and luggage load capacity is
200 lbs.:
800 lbs. minus 600 lbs. = 200 lbs.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Driving tips
123
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated
in step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, part of
the load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult the manual for
transporting a trailer to determine how this
may reduce the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
Load
The permissible load is the total of the weight of
occupants and cargo/luggage. The greater the
weight of occupants, the less cargo/luggage
can be transported.
Stowing cargo
> Place heavy cargo as far forward and as low
as possible, placing it directly behind the
bulkhead behind the rear seats.
> Cover sharp edges and corners.
Securing cargo
> Use the luggage net
*
or securing straps to
hold down small and lightweight luggage
and cargo.
> Heavy-duty cargo straps
*
for securing
larger and heavier objects are available at
your BMW center. Four lashing eyes
mounted in the luggage compartment are
used to secure these heavy-duty cargo
straps, refer to arrows.
> Please observe the special instructions
supplied with the heavy-duty cargo straps.
Position and secure the cargo as
described above, so that it cannot endan-
ger the vehicle's occupants, for example if sud-
den braking or evasive maneuvers are neces-
sary.
When fastening lashings, use only the lashing
eyes, refer to illustration; otherwise, the lash-
ings could come loose or you could damage the
vehicle.
Never exceed the approved gross vehicle
weight or either of the approved axle loads, refer
to page 226, as excessive loads can pose a
safety hazard, and may also put you in violation
of freeway safety laws.
You should never transport unsecured heavy or
hard objects in the passenger compartment, as
they could fly around and pose a safety hazard
to the vehicle's occupants during abrupt brak-
ing or evasive maneuvers.<
Pad on base of luggage compartment
You can use the pad as needed, for example to
transport soiled objects. The rubberized side is
washable and has an anti-skid effect.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Navigation
This chapter describes how you can
enter destinations and specify your route
so that your navigation system guides you
reliably to your destination.
Navigation
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Starting navigation system
126
Starting navigation system
Your navigation system can use satellites to
ascertain the precise position of your vehicle
and guide you reliably to any destination you
enter.
Navigation DVD
The navigation system requires a special navi-
gation DVD. The latest version is available at
your BMW center.
Inserting navigation DVD
1. Insert the navigation DVD with the labeled
side up. The navigation DVD is pulled in
automatically.
2. Wait several seconds for the system to scan
the data from the DVD.
Removing navigation DVD
1. Press button 1.
The DVD emerges slightly from the drive.
2. Remove the DVD.
If the DVD is not ejected from the drive, it is pos-
sible that it is blocked. In this case a message is
also shown on the Control Display.
Display in the assistance
window
You can display the route or the current position
in the assistance window. This display remains
visible even if you change to another applica-
tion.
1. Move the controller to the right to enter the
assistance window.
2. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
3. Select the desired route view or "Current
position".
4. Press the controller.
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
127
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Displaying arrow view in map view
If the navigation system suggests a change of
direction, the arrow view is briefly displayed.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "Language / Units"
is selected and press the controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Languages" is selected and
press the controller.
6. Select "Arrow display pop-up instructions"
and press the controller.
The arrow display is shown.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Destination entry
128
Destination entry
In entering your destination you can select from
among the following options:
> Entering a destination manually, see below
> Entering destination via voice*, refer to
page 131
> Selecting destination using information,
refer to page 134
> Selecting destination from a list, refer to
Destination list, page 135
> Selecting destination from address book,
refer to page 136
> Selecting home address, refer to page 138
After selecting your destination you can pro-
ceed to start the destination guidance, refer to
page 140.
Enter data only when the vehicle is sta-
tionary, and always obey the traffic regu-
lations and road signs in the event of any con-
tradiction between traffic and road conditions
and the instructions issued by the navigation
system. If you do not observe this precaution,
you can endanger the vehicle occupants and
other road users.<
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the right to call up
"Navigation".
3. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
Entering a destination
manually
The system's word-matching principle makes it
easier for you to enter the names of streets or
towns, refer to page 139. This allows you to
enter different spellings and completes your
entry automatically so that stored names can be
called up quickly.
1. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Navigation" is selected and
press the controller.
"New destination" is selected.
2. Press the controller.
3. Select "Enter address" and press the con-
troller.
The system also assists you with the following
features:
> If you do not enter a street, the system will
guide you to the downtown area of a town or
city.
> You can skip the entry of country and town/
city if the current entries are being retained
for your new destination.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
129
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Selecting country
1. Select "State / Province" or the displayed
country and press the controller.
A list of available countries appears on the
display.
2. Select the country of destination and press
the controller.
In order to be able to start the destination guid-
ance, at least the town/city of destination or its
zip code must be entered.
Entering town/city of destination via
name
1. Select "Town / City" or the displayed town/
city and press the controller.
2. Select the first letter and press the control-
ler.
A list of all towns/cities starting with this let-
ter appears on the Control Display.
3. To delete the letter entered if necessary:
> Delete individual numbers or letters:
Move the controller toward the right to
select and press the controller.
> Delete all digits or letters:
Move the controller toward the right to
select and press the controller
longer.
4. Enter additional letters if necessary.
The list gradually grows smaller each time
you enter a new letter.
> To enter a blank space if necessary:
Select the symbol and press the con-
troller.
5. Change to the third field from the top if nec-
essary. Turn the controller until the town/
city name is selected from the list and press
the controller.
Entering town/city of destination via
zip code
1. Select "Town / City" and press the control-
ler.
2. Enter the zip code:
Select the individual digits and press the
controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Destination entry
130
> Enter a blank space:
Select the symbol and press the con-
troller.
> Delete individual digits or letters:
Move the controller toward the right to
select and press the controller.
> Delete all digits or letters:
Move the controller toward the right to
select and press the controller
longer.
3. Select the zip code and press the controller.
The corresponding town/city of destination
is displayed.
4. Change into the third field from the top.
Turn the controller until the town/city of
destination is selected and press the con-
troller.
Entering street, house number and
intersection
After the street you can also enter the intersec-
tion or the house number.
Entering street and intersection
1. Select "Street" or the displayed street and
press the controller.
2. Enter the street.
The street is entered in exactly the same
way as the town/city of destination.
The intersection is entered in the same way as
the street.
Entering a street without entering
town/city of destination
You can also enter a street without entering a
town/city of destination. In this case all streets
of the entered country are offered for selection.
The related town/city is displayed after the
street name.
If a town/city has already been entered, you can
undo this entry. This may be practical if the
desired street does not exist in the entered
town/city of destination, because, for example,
it belongs to another part of the town/city.
1. Change to upper field.
The arrow is selected.
2. Turn the controller to the right until the
request for the entry of a street in the coun-
try appears and press the controller.
3. Change to the second field from the top and
enter the street.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
131
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Entering house number
All house numbers stored for the street on the
navigation DVD can be entered.
1. Select "House number" and press the con-
troller.
2. Enter the house number:
Select the individual digits and press the
controller.
3. Change into the third field from the top.
Turn the controller until the house number
is selected and press the controller.
Starting destination guidance with
manual destination entry
> Select "Start guidance" and press the con-
troller.
Destination guidance starts immediately.
> If destination guidance is not to be started
immediately:
Select "Add to destination list" and press
the controller.
The destination is stored in the destination
list, refer to page 135.
Entering destination via
voice*
You can enter a desired destination with the
voice command system. When entering the
destination, it is possible to change between
voice command and iDrive at any time. Reacti-
vate the voice command function for this pur-
pose if necessary.
With {Options} you can have the system
read aloud the possible commands.<
1. Press the button on the steering wheel
or in the center console.
Selecting country
1. Wait for the system to ask for the country of
destination.
Say the name of the country of destination in
the language of the voice command system.
Entering town/city of destination
The town/city of destination can be spelled or
entered as an entire word.
Spelling town/city of destination
To enter the town/city of destination, spell it
using the customary spelling of the country of
destination.
Pronounce the letters smoothly and at normal
volume, avoiding excessive emphasis and
pauses.
The system can suggest up to 20 towns/cit-
ies of destination that match your entries.
Up to 6 entries are displayed at once on the
Control Display.
2. {Enter address}
2. Say the name of the country of destina-
tion.
1. Spell town/city name:
Say at least the first three letters of the
town/city of destination. The more let-
ters you say, the more exactly the sys-
tem recognizes the town/city.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Destination entry
132
The town/city can also be selected from the list
via iDrive:
Turn the controller until the town/city of desti-
nation is selected and press the controller.
Entering the destination as an entire
word*
Towns/cities of destination and streets located
in the region where the language of the voice
command system is spoken can be entered as
an entire word.
Example: to enter a US town/city of destination
as an entire word, the system language must be
English.
The condition for this is the use of a suitable
navigation DVD.
Speak smoothly and at normal volume, avoiding
excessive emphasis and pauses.
1. Wait for the system to request the town/city
of destination.
The system can suggest up to 6 towns/cit-
ies of destination that match your entries.
The town/city can also be selected from the list
via iDrive:
Turn the controller until the town/city of desti-
nation is selected and press the controller.
Destinations that sound the same which
cannot be differentiated by the system
are summarized in a separate list and shown as
a destination followed by three dots.
Select this entry with {Yes} if necessary. Then
select the desired city/town in this list.<
Entering street and house number
The street is entered in the same way as the
town/city of destination.
To enter the house number:
Up to 4-digit house numbers can be entered.
Say the house number as individual digits.
Starting destination guidance
Destination guidance starts immediately.
A destination is suggested by the system.
2. Select a town/city:
> Select highlighted town/city: {Yes}
> Select other town/city: {No}
> Select entry, e.g. {Entry 3}
> Display additional entries of the list:
{Next page}
> To respell the town/city: {Repeat}
2. Say the name of the town/city of desti-
nation.
A destination is suggested by the system.
3. Select a town/city:
> Select highlighted town/city: {Yes}
> Select other town/city: {No}
> Select entry, e.g. {Entry 3}
> Reenter the town/city: {Repeat}
> Enter town/city of destination by
spelling it: {Spell}
1. {House number}
2. Say the house number.
{Start guidance}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
133
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Saving destination
The destination is added to the destination list
or can be saved in the address book.
Map-guided destination
selection
If you only know the location of the town/city or
street of the destination, then you can input the
destination by using a map. You can use the
cursor to select the destination on the map and
then adopt it into the destination guidance.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
"New destination" is selected.
2. Press the controller.
3. Select "Input map" and press the controller.
A section of a map is displayed on the Con-
trol Display:
> During destination guidance, around the
current destination
> With the destination guidance deacti-
vated, around the last destination
entered
4. Select a destination with the cursor.
> Changing scale: turn the controller.
> Moving map: move the controller in the
corresponding direction.
The controller can be moved to the left,
right, forward and back.
5. Press the controller to accept or store the
destination in the destination guidance sys-
tem.
The selected town/city of destination and
other menu items are displayed.
6. Select the desired menu item:
> "Start route guidance" starts destination
guidance.
> "Show current position" places the cur-
rent position in the center of the map.
> "Show destination position" places the
current destination in the center of the
map.
> "Return to map" changes back to the
"Input map".
> Exit the menu.
7. Press the controller.
The map for destination input can also be called
up from the map view:
Select the symbol and press the controller.
{Add to destination list} or
{Add to address book}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Destination entry
134
Selecting destination using
information
You can obtain a display of selected destina-
tions, e.g. hotels, sights or hospitals, and adopt
them into the destination guidance.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Select "Information" and press the control-
ler.
3. Select a location:
> "On destination"
> "On location"
> "On a new destination"
4. Press the controller.
5. Make your selection, e.g. "Hotels and res-
taurants", and press the controller.
6. Enter search criteria if necessary, e.g. the
maximum distance from the current loca-
tion.
7. Select "<Start search>" and press the con-
troller.
These destinations are displayed on the
Control Display.
8. Select a destination and press the control-
ler.
The scope of the information and
symbols is dependent on the respec-
tive navigation DVD.<
9. Select the desired menu item:
> To adopt the address into the destina-
tion list and start the destination guid-
ance:
Select the symbol and press the
controller.
> To establish a telephone connection:
Select the symbol and press the con-
troller.
> To display additional destinations:
Select the symbol and press the
controller.
> To start a new search:
Select the symbol and press the con-
troller.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
135
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Symbols in map view
If, for example, you have selected the category
Hotels, the hotels are shown on the map as
symbols.
To hide the symbols in the map view:
1. Select the symbol and press the controller.
2. Select "Hide map icons" and press the con-
troller.
The symbols are hidden.
To display the symbols:
Select "Show map icons" and press the con-
troller.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Destination list
The last 20 destinations entered into the desti-
nation list are displayed. You can select these
destinations and adopt them into the destina-
tion guidance system.
For example, in order to plan a longer route, you
can store all of the destinations you wish to visit
in the destination list ahead of time, refer to
Entering a destination manually on page 128.
Select "Navigation" and press the controller.
The last destination entered is the first item in
the destination list.
This symbol indicates the current destina-
tion during destination guide.
To display other destinations in the destination
list:
turn the controller.
Adopting the destination into the
destination guidance system
1. Select the desired destination from the des-
tination list and press the controller.
2. Select "Start guidance" and press the con-
troller.
Editing the destination list
1. Select the desired destination from the des-
tination list and press the controller.
2. The selected destination can be edited:
> Saving entry:
Select "Add to address book".
> Displaying information on destination:
Select "Information on destination".
> Deleting entry:
Select "Delete entry".
> Deleting all entries:
Select "Delete list". Destination guid-
ance is switched off.
> Changing entry:
Select "Edit". For operation, refer to
Entering town/city of destination via
name, page 129.
3. Press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Destination entry
136
Address book
Opening address book
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
Select "Address book" and press the controller.
Storing destinations in address book
You can store approx. 100 destinations in the
address book.
1. Select "Address book" and press the con-
troller.
2. Select "New address" and press the con-
troller.
3. Select "Enter address" and press the con-
troller.
4. Enter name and address, also refer to
Entering a destination manually, page 128.
5. Select "Store in address book" and press
the controller.
The entry is stored in the address book.
You can also store a destination from the desti-
nation list in the address book, refer to
page 135.
Storing current position*
The current position can be adopted into the
address book.
1. Select "Address book" and press the con-
troller.
2. Change into the third field from the top.
Turn the controller until "New address" is
selected and press the controller.
3. Select "Use current location as address"
and press the controller.
The name given can be changed. For oper-
ation, refer to Entering a destination manu-
ally, page 128.
4. Select "Store in address book" and press
the controller.
You can also enter your current position in the
address book if you have left the sector covered
by the navigation DVD. In this case, you must
enter a name.
Selecting destinations from address
book
1. Select "Address book" and press the con-
troller.
The stored entries are displayed on the
Control Display.
2. Select the entry and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
137
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
To start destination guidance:
Select "Start guidance" and press the control-
ler.
Changing destinations from address
book
1. Select "Address book" and press the con-
troller.
2. Select the entry and press the controller.
3. Select "Edit address" and press the con-
troller.
4. Change entry.
For operation, refer to Entering a destina-
tion manually, page 128.
5. Select "Store in address book" and press
the controller.
Deleting individual destinations from
address book
1. Select "Address book" and press the con-
troller.
2. Select the entry and press the controller.
3. Select "Delete address" and press the con-
troller.
4. Select "Yes" and press the controller.
Deleting all destinations from address
book
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Delete data" is selected and
press the controller.
6. Select "Delete address book" and press the
controller.
7. Select "Yes" and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Destination entry
138
Storing home address
You can store your current position or the cur-
rent destination as a home address in the
address book. This entry is in the second posi-
tion in the address book.
1. Select "Address book" and press the con-
troller.
2. Change into the third field from the top.
Turn the controller until "Home address" is
selected and press the controller.
3. Select "Use current location as address", or
"Save current destination" during the desti-
nation guidance, and press the controller.
4. Select "Store in address book" and press
the controller.
Adopting home address as destination
1. Select "Home address" and press the con-
troller.
2. Select "Start guidance" and press the con-
troller.
Changing home address
1. Select "Home address" and press the con-
troller.
2. Select "Edit address" and press the con-
troller. For operation, refer to Entering a
destination manually, page 128.
Selecting route
You can influence the calculated route by
choosing certain route criteria. You can change
the route criteria as often as you like when
entering the destination and whenever the des-
tination guidance is active.
The route is planned according to fixed rules,
taking the road type into account, e.g. whether
it involves freeways or winding roads. The road
types are stored on the navigation DVD. As a
result, the routes recommended by the naviga-
tion system may not always be the same ones
that you would choose based on personal expe-
rience.
Changing route criteria
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Change into the third field from the top.
Turn the controller until "Route preference"
is selected and press the controller.
The various criteria are listed on the Control
Display.
3. Select a route criterion for the route:
> "With highways"
Freeways and major traffic arteries are
given priority.
> "Avoid highways"
Freeways are avoided where possible.
> "Fast route"
The short traveling time, being a combi-
nation of the shortest possible route and
the fastest roads
> "Short route"
Short route, regardless of how fast or
slow progress will be
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
139
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
4. Press the controller.
The route criterion is selected.
5. If necessary, select an additional route cri-
terion and then press the controller:
> "Dynamic route"
*
Automatic changing of the route in case
of traffic obstructions. Depending on the
type of road as well as the type and
length of traffic obstruction, the route
can also be calculated in a way that
passes through the traffic obstruction.
> "Avoid tollroads"
Tollroads are avoided where possible.
> "Avoid ferries"
Ferries are avoided where possible.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
The route criteria can also be changed in the
arrow or map view:
1. Select the symbol for the route criterion and
press the controller.
2. Select a route criterion and press the con-
troller.
Word matching principle
The system supports the word matching princi-
ple to make it easier for you to enter the names
of streets or towns/cities. The system runs
ongoing checks, comparing your destination
entries with the data stored on the navigation
DVD as the basis for instant response. The user
benefits include:
> Names of specific towns/cities can also vary
from the official versions, provided that the
spelling of the entry corresponds to a stan-
dard form used in another country.
Example:
Instead of "Munich", you can also enter the
German spelling "München" or the Italian
spelling "Monaco".
> When you are entering the names of towns/
cities and streets, the system will complete
them automatically as soon as enough let-
ters are available to ensure unambiguous
identification.
> The system only accepts name entries
beginning with letters that are stored on the
navigation DVD. The system will not accept
nonexistent names and addresses.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Destination guidance
140
Destination guidance
Starting destination
guidance
1. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Navigation" is selected and
press the controller.
2. Select a destination from the destination list
and press the controller or enter a new des-
tination, refer to page 128.
3. Select "Start guidance" and press the con-
troller.
After the route has been calculated, destination
guidance is indicated by arrows or a map dis-
play on the Control Display.
If the route criteria "Avoid highways",
"Avoid tollroads" or "Avoid ferries" are
selected, the calculation time for the route can
increase considerably.<
The destination guidance can also be started in
the arrow or map view:
Select the symbol and press the controller.
During destination guidance, you can operate
other equipment via iDrive at any time. You are
notified well in advance of a necessary change
of direction by spoken instructions and the dis-
play of the direction arrows.
Terminating/continuing
destination guidance
In arrow display or map view
Select the symbol and press the controller.
In destination list
This symbol marks the current destination.
1. Select the current destination and press the
controller.
2. Select "Stop guidance" and press the con-
troller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
141
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
If the destination was not reached before the
end of the last trip, upon restarting you will
see the question:
"Continue guidance to destination?".
The destination guidance starts automatically
after a short time.
To start destination guidance immediately:
Select "Yes" and press the controller.
Displaying route
You have the option of displaying various views
of the route during destination guidance.
From another menu, you can change
directly to the screen last displayed,
refer to Comfort opening of menu items,
page 18.<
Displaying arrow display
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Change into the fourth field from the top.
Turn the controller until "Arrow display" is
selected and press the controller.
The arrow display is displayed.
1 Switching voice instructions on/off
2 Manually displaying traffic information
*
3 Selecting route criteria
4 Starting/stopping destination guidance
5 Arrow to destination as the crow flies
6 Distance to the next change of direction
7 Current position
8 Direction of travel
> Hollow arrow:
Destination guidance on the calculated
route.
> Solid arrow:
Arrow shows the route to be calculated
from a bird's eye view when the vehicle
is not located in an area contained on the
navigation DVD, e.g. in a multilevel park-
ing lot.
Depending on the equipment, the estimated
time of arrival and the distance to the destina-
tion are displayed in the top or bottom line of the
Control Display.
Before a change of direction, the appearance of
the arrow changes.
1 Street name for change of direction
2 Distance to change of direction
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Destination guidance
142
3 Change of direction
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Displaying map view
You can have your current position displayed on
a map. After starting the destination guidance,
the planned route is shown on the map.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Change into the fourth field from the top.
Turn the controller until the desired map
view is selected:
> "Map facing north"
> "Map direction of travel"
> "Perspective"
3. Press the controller.
1 Switching voice instructions on/off
2 Starting/stopping destination guidance
3 Selecting destination using map
4 Displaying the menu in which the informa-
tion last selected can be displayed/hidden,
refer to Selecting destination via informa-
tion on page 134
5 Changing map view
> "Map facing north"
> "Map direction of travel"
> "Perspective"
6 Changing route criteria
7 Manually displaying traffic information
*
8 Arrow to destination as the crow flies
The estimated time of arrival and the distance
to the destination are shown in the bottom line
of the Control Display.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
At scales of less than 250 miles/500 km, you
have the option of deciding whether to orient
the map to north or toward your current direc-
tion of travel. At scales of 250 miles/500 km or
greater, the map always points toward north.
Changing map view
Select the corresponding symbol and press the
controller.
The next map view is displayed.
Changing scale
Turn the controller to change the scale.
Displaying towns/cities and streets of
the route
You can have the roads and towns along the
route displayed during destination guidance.
The distances remaining to be traveled on each
individual road are also displayed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
143
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Change into the third field from the top.
Turn the controller until "Route list" is
selected and press the controller.
To exit the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Destination guidance with
voice instructions
Switching voice instructions on/off
Voice instructions can be switched on or off
during the destination guidance in the arrow or
map view:
Select the symbol and press the controller.
To switch the voice instructions on/off at any
time:
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "Language / Units"
is selected and press the controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Languages" is selected and
press the controller.
6. Select "Navigation voice instructions" and
press the controller.
The voice instructions are switched on.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use
*
.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Destination guidance
144
Repeating and canceling voice
instructions
With the programmable buttons on the steering
wheel you can also make the following settings,
refer to page 55:
> Repeat the voice instruction:
Press the button.
> Switch voice instructions on/off:
Press button longer.
Setting volume of voice instructions
The volume can only be adjusted during a voice
instruction.
1. Repeat the last voice instruction, if required.
2. Turn the knob during the voice instruction
to select the desired volume.
This volume is independent of the volume of the
audio sources.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Bypassing route sections
During destination guidance, you can revise the
navigation system's route recommendations to
avoid particular stretches of road. Enter the
number of miles/kilometers that you want to
travel before returning to the original route.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Change into the third field from the top.
Turn the controller until "New route" is
selected and press the controller.
3. Turn the controller to enter the desired
number and press the controller.
The route is recalculated.
To exit from the menu without changing the
route:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Traffic information*
In population centers you can display traffic
information from radio stations that transmit
information of the Traffic Info traffic warning
service. This information of the traffic warning
services is constantly updated using measuring
data from traffic routing centers and information
from traffic congestion indicators.
During destination guidance the traffic informa-
tion located near you on the route is automati-
cally displayed. Regardless of whether the des-
tination guidance is active, you can display the
traffic information in the map view or in a list.
Switching reception of traffic
information on/off
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
145
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "Traffic Info set-
tings" is selected and press the controller.
5. Select "Traffic Info" and press the control-
ler.
The traffic information can be received and
displayed.
"AUTO": automatic selection of the Traffic Info
station with the strongest reception.
Depending on the station, either the sta-
tion name, frequency, local number or
other information is displayed.<
Manually displaying traffic information
During destination guidance
Traffic information can be displayed manually
during destination guidance in the arrow or map
view.
If the symbol is shown with a red border, traf-
fic information is available for the planned route.
Select the symbol and press the controller.
During destination guidance, the traffic infor-
mation on the planned route is marked with a
yellow lozenge.
First the traffic information along the planned
route is shown sorted according to the distance
to the current vehicle position.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Destination guidance
146
With destination guidance switched off
1. Open the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the right to call up
"Navigation".
3. Select "Traffic Info" and press the control-
ler.
First the traffic information along the planned
route is shown sorted according to the distance
to the current vehicle position.
Displaying detailed traffic information
Select a traffic information item from the list and
press the controller.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Depiction of traffic information in map
view
The traffic information symbols are shown in
the map view up to a scale of 100 miles/200 km.
With a scale of up to 5 miles/10 km, additional
information is displayed. The length, direction
and effect of a traffic obstruction are indicated
with arrows along the route, e.g.
Along planned route
Colored symbol with the traffic obstruction
symbol.
Outside planned route
> Map scale up to 5 miles/10 km:
White symbol with black or gray border with
the traffic obstruction symbol
> Map scale from 10 miles/20 km:
White symbol with black border and an
arrow in the direction concerned
Traffic event with map scales greater
than 5miles/10km, arrow points in
the direction of travel concerned
Several traffic events have been
received. Select a smaller scale to
display these individually.
Slow traffic or other event
Traffic back up
Stopped traffic
Traffic event in both directions of
travel
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
147
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Traffic information during destination
guidance
The system behavior varies depending on
whether "Dynamic route" is selected.
Displaying traffic obstructions
If a traffic obstruction is reported to the naviga-
tion system and "Dynamic route" is not
selected, you will be provided with certain infor-
mation from a distance of approx. 25 miles/
40 km, e.g. the length of the traffic congestion.
The last possible junction will be displayed
shortly before this.
Select "Detour" and press the controller.
The navigation system determines a new route
to bypass the traffic congestion.
This information is also displayed if you have
called up a different application on the Control
Display.
Hiding traffic obstructions
If "Dynamic route" is selected, the route in case
of traffic obstructions is automatically changed.
The system does not point out traffic obstruc-
tions along the original route.
Depending on the type of road as well as the
type and length of traffic obstruction, the route
can also be calculated in a way that passes
through the traffic obstruction.
Symbols for traffic information
Traffic light failure
Roadwork
General traffic obstruction
Transport of hazardous load
Vehicle on wrong carriage way
Danger
Low clearance
No parking
Fog
Heavy rain
Slippery road
Cross winds
Smog
Road close
Slow traffic
Traffic back up
Stopped traffic
Icy roads
Uneven surface
Accident
Lane closure
Delay
Police checkpoint
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Destination guidance
148
Displaying current position
You can also display your current position with
the destination guidance switched off.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Change into the fourth field from the top.
Turn the controller until "Current position"
is selected and press the controller.
The current position of your BMW is displayed.
If the navigation system is unable to identify a
town or city, your current map coordinates will
appear.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
You can also have the current position dis-
played on a map, refer to page 142.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
149
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
What to do if …
What to do if …
> a navigation DVD is inserted, but the
request to insert the DVD is displayed on
the Control Display?
The navigation DVD may not be the right
DVD for the navigation system. The DVD is
labeled accordingly.
> you request the current position of your
vehicle, but do not receive a precise dis-
play?
The system is unable to receive enough
GPS signals at your current position due to
obstructions, your position is not yet avail-
able on your navigation DVD, or the system
is in the process of calculating your posi-
tion. As a rule, reception is guaranteed in
the open air.
> the destination guidance does not accept a
destination?
The data of the destination is not stored on
the navigation DVD that is loaded. Select a
destination that is as close as possible to
the original.
> the destination guidance does not accept a
destination without the street name?
On the navigation DVD, no downtown area
can be determined for the city or town
entered. Enter any street, or a destination
such as the railway station etc., then start
the destination guidance.
> you want to enter a destination for the des-
tination guidance, but it is not possible to
select the letters for your desired entry?
The data of the destination is not stored on
the navigation DVD that is loaded. In this
case, the system will not offer you any let-
ters to choose from. Select a destination
that is as close as possible to the original.
> the system stops furnishing directions on
which way to turn as you approach intersec-
tions?
You are driving in an area that has not yet
been completely recorded on the naviga-
tion DVD. Instead of an arrow indicating a
turn, you will see an arrow which indicates
the general direction of your planned route.
Or you have left the recommended route
and the system requires a few seconds to
calculate a new recommended route.
> the navigation system does not react to
entries?
If the battery has just been reconnected
after having been disconnected, it then
takes up to 10 minutes before the system is
once again operational.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Entertainment
This chapter describes the operation
of the radio and CD player as well as
their tone settings.
Entertainment
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
On/off and tone
152
On/off and tone
The following audio sources have shared con-
trols and setting options:
> Professional
*
radio or
Business radio
> CD player
> CD changer
*
Controls
The audio sources can be operated using:
> Buttons near CD player
> iDrive
> Buttons on steering wheel, refer to page 11
Buttons near CD player
The layout of the buttons can vary depending
on your vehicle's equipment.
One drive:
Two drives:
1 Entertainment sound output on/off, volume
> Press: switch on/off.
When you switch on, the last set radio
station or CD track is played.
> Turn: adjust volume.
2 Drive for audio CDs
3 Eject CD
4 Station scan/track search
> Change radio station.
> Select track for CD player and
CD changer.
5 Drive for navigation DVDs
Operating via iDrive
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to call up
"Entertainment".
You have the following choices:
> "FM" and "AM": radio reception
> "WB": Weather Band station
> "SAT": satellite radio
> "CD": CD player or CD changer
> "AUX": AUX-In connection
> "Set": depending on the audio source,
other adjustments can be made, e.g. with
the radio: update station with strongest
reception, store station, tone control, sam-
ple stations.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
153
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
From another menu, you can change
directly to the screen last displayed,
refer to Comfort opening of menu items,
page 18.<
With the ignition key in radio-ready position or
higher, the selected audio source is stored for
the remote control currently in use.
Switching on/off
To switch the Entertainment sound output on/
off:
Press knob 1 next to the CD player.
This symbol on the Control Display indi-
cates that sound output is switched off.
For a single drive, the sound output is available
for approx. 20 minutes with the ignition
switched off.
To do so, switch the sound output on again.
Adjusting volume
Turn knob 1 next to the CD player until the
desired volume is set.
You can also adjust the volume with the buttons
on the steering wheel, refer to page 11.
From radio readiness, the setting for the remote
control used at the moment is saved.
Tone control
You can alter various tone settings, e.g. treble
and bass, or the speed-dependent volume
increase.
The sound settings are globally adjusted for all
audio sources.
From radio readiness, the settings are saved for
the remote control used at the moment.
Changing tone settings
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Select "Audio" and press the controller.
The tone settings can also be selected when
you have opened "Entertainment" in the start
menu:
Select "Set" and then "Tone", and press the
controller.
Treble and bass
1. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Treble / Bass" is selected
and press the controller.
2. Move the controller to the left or right to
select "Treble" or "Bass".
3. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
On/off and tone
154
Balance and fader
You can adjust the volume distribution in the
same manner as "Treble / Bass".
> "Balance": left/right volume distribution
> "Fader": front/rear volume distribution
Speed-dependent volume control
The speed-dependent volume control auto-
matically increases the volume with increasing
speed. You can set various stages for the
increase in volume.
1. Select "Speed volume" and press the con-
troller.
2. Turn the controller:
The adjustment is applied; the field can be
changed.
Individual high-end sound system*
You can choose between Stereo and Surround.
1. Select "Surround Settings" and press the
controller.
2. Select "Stereo" or "Surround".
3. Press the controller.
The spatial sound effect is activated.
Professional LOGIC7 HiFi System*
You can select a spatial sound effect that
improves the spatial acoustics in all frequency
ranges.
1. Select "Surround Settings" and press the
controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
155
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
2. Select "Concert hall" or "Theater".
3. Press the controller.
LOGIC7 spatial sound is switched on.
To switch off spatial sound:
Select "Off" and press the controller.
LOGIC7 and the LOGIC7 logo are registered
trade marks of Lexicon, Inc., a company of the
Harman International Group.
Equalizer*
You can set individual sound frequency ranges:
1. Select "Equalizer" and press the controller.
2. Move the controller to the left or right to
select the desired frequency range.
3. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.
Resetting tone settings
You can reset all tone settings to the default
settings.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Select "Audio" and press the controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Reset" is selected and
press the controller.
With two drives: select "Yes".
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Radio
156
Radio
Your radio provides reception of the FM and AM
wavebands.
Listening to radio
Press the button if the sound output is switched
off.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to call up
"Entertainment".
3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "FM" or "AM" is selected.
4. Press the controller.
Stations are shown on the Control Display on
the basis of various selection criteria, e.g. "Pre-
sets".
If "Autostore" does not display any stations or
if the stations displayed can no longer be
received, to update the station with the stron-
gest signal, refer to page 157.
Changing stations
Turn the controller.
In addition to the stations currently displayed,
you can have stations with another selection
criterion displayed.
Professional* radio
You can choose from the following selection
criteria:
> "All stations":
Stations that can currently be received in
the "FM" waveband.
> "Autostore":
The stations with the strongest received
signals in the "AM" waveband.
With High Definition Radio: the stations with
the strongest received signals in the "FM"
waveband.
> "Presets":
Stations you have stored, refer to page 158.
> "Manual":
Set stations that are received in addition to
those displayed.
Business radio
You can choose from the following selection
criteria:
> "Autostore":
The stations with the strongest signal, refer
to page 157.
> "Presets":
Stations you have stored, refer to page 158.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
157
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
> "Manual":
Set stations that are received in addition to
those displayed.
Changing selection criteria
1. Change into the second field from the top.
2. Turn the controller until the desired selec-
tion criterion is selected and press the con-
troller.
Buttons next to CD player
Press the button for the corresponding
direction.
The system changes to the next displayed sta-
tion.
You can also change stations with buttons on
the steering wheel, refer to page 11.
Sampling stations, scan
The system automatically plays a brief sample
from each of the stations on the current wave-
band.
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-
ler.
"Set" is selected.
2. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
3. Select "Scan" and press the controller.
The stations are sampled.
To end sampling:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Scan" and press the controller.
This cancels sampling of the stations, and the
radio remains on the current station.
Buttons next to CD player
To sample the stations, press and hold the
button for the corresponding direction.
To stop scanning, press the button again.
Selecting frequency manually
With "Manual" you can select stations that are
received in addition to those displayed.
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-
ler.
2. Change into the second field from the top.
3. Select "Manual" and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller to set a certain fre-
quency.
Updating stations with best reception
For Professional radio with "AM" and Business
radio:
If you are on a longer journey and leave the
transmission range of the stations originally set,
you can update the list of stations with the best
reception signal.
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-
ler.
2. Change into the second field from the top.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Radio
158
3. Select "Autostore" and press the controller.
"Set" is selected.
4. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
5. Select "Autostore" and press the controller.
The display of the stations with the strongest
reception is updated. The frequencies of the
stations are displayed.
Storing stations
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-
ler.
2. Change into the second field from the top.
Turn the controller until the desired selec-
tion criterion is selected and press the con-
troller.
3. Select the desired frequency or station.
"Set" is selected.
4. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
5. Select "Store" and press the controller.
"Presets" is displayed.
6. Turn the controller until the desired mem-
ory position is selected.
7. Press the controller.
The station is stored.
The stations of the last selection criterion are
displayed once again after a short time.
From radio readiness, the stations are saved for
the remote control used at the moment.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
159
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Changing a memory position
1. Select "Presets" and press the controller.
2. Select the desired station.
"Set" is selected.
3. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
4. Select "Store" and press the controller.
5. Turn the controller until the desired mem-
ory position is selected.
The number of the memory position
appears beside the name or frequency of
the station.
6. Press the controller.
The station is stored.
RDS Radio Data System
In the FM frequency range, additional informa-
tion is transmitted via RDS. If the reception con-
ditions are good, the station names are shown
on the Control Display. If the reception is weak
or disrupted, it can take some time before the
station names are displayed.
Switching RDS on/off*
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-
ler.
"Set" is selected.
2. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
3. Select "RDS" and press the controller.
RDS is activated.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Automatically sorting
stations*
For the "All stations" selection criterion, you
can set whether the most frequently used sta-
tions are displayed at the beginning.
1. Select "All stations" and press the control-
ler.
"Set" is selected.
2. Select "Favorites" and press the controller.
The most frequently used stations are
shown at the beginning.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Radio
160
Weather news flashes*
Weather Radio is a service of the National Oce-
anic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA)
of the US Department of Trade. Weather news
flashes are repeated every 4 to 6 minutes and
are routinely updated at intervals of 1 to
3 hours, and more often when necessary. Most
stations operate 24 hours a day. In case of a
storm, the National Weather Service interrupts
the routine weather news and transmits special
warning messages instead. If you have a ques-
tion about NOAA Weather Radio, please con-
tact the nearest office of the National Weather
Service. Details are also provided on the Inter-
net at www.nws.noaa.gov.
Calling up weather news flashes
1. Select "WB" and press the controller.
2. Select a station.
The station for weather news flashes may be
unavailable in some regions.
High Definition Radio*
Many stations transmit both analog and digital
signals. You can receive these stations digitally
and with improved sound quality.
A digital radio network must be available in
order to receive digital stations
Activating/deactivating digital radio
reception
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Select "Audio" and press the controller.
5. Change to upper field. Turn the controller
until "HD radio" is selected and press the
controller.
6. Select "Off" and press the controller.
The reception of digital stations is deac-
tivated.
This symbol is displayed when a station is
being received digitally.
With some stations the digital signals are not
transmitted simultaneously with the analog sig-
nals. If you are in an area in which the selected
station is not continuously received digitally,
playback switches between analog and digital
reception. This can result in repetitions or inter-
ruptions. In this case it may be advisable to
deactivate digital radio reception.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
161
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Selecting programs of a digital station*
Some stations transmit several programs.
To select one of these programs:
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-
ler.
2. Select "Manual" and press the controller.
3. Select a station that is received digitally.
This symbol is displayed when a station
is being received digitally.
4. Switch to the next program of the dig-
ital station with the buttons on the radio or
the steering wheel.
Updating stations offering digital
reception
If you are on a longer journey and leave the
transmission range of the stations originally set,
you can update the list of stations with the best
reception signal.
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-
ler.
2. Change into the second field from the top.
3. Select "Autostore" and press the controller.
4. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
5. Select "Autostore " and press the con-
troller.
The display of the stations offering digital
reception is updated. This can take up to
2minutes.
Displaying additional information
With the digital stations, additional information
on the current track is displayed, e.g. the name
of the artist.
1. Select a station and press the controller.
2. Select "Details" and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Radio
162
The information is displayed.
If a digital station is received again when the
station is changed, the additional information
will be displayed again following a brief interrup-
tion.
Satellite radio*
You can receive up to 100 different channels
with high sound quality.
The channels are offered to you in predefined
packages. To receive the channels of your
choice, you must have this package enabled.
With this new technology the signal may
fail, causing interruptions in reception.<
Enabling or disabling channels
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to call up
"Entertainment".
3. Select "SAT".
4. Press the controller.
The channels are displayed.
These channels are enabled.
Enabling
1. Select a channel that has not yet been
enabled and press the controller.
A telephone number and the electronic
serial number, ESN, are displayed.
The electronic serial number is
required for enabling or disabling.<
2. To enable the channels:
Dial phone number.
Disabling
1. Select an enabled channel and press the
controller.
2. Select "ESN" and press the controller.
The electronic serial number, ESN, is dis-
played.
The electronic serial number is
required to disable.<
3. To have the channels disabled:
Dial phone number.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
163
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Selecting and storing channel
1. Select "SAT" and press the controller.
Channels are shown on the Control Display
sorted on the basis of selection criteria.
2. Select a menu item:
> "Presets":
Up to twelve channels you have stored
previously.
> "All channels":
All channels are displayed.
> "Categories":
All channels sorted by category, e.g.
news, jazz.
3. Press the controller.
4. If "Categories" has been selected:
Select the desired category and press the
controller.
The channels of this category are displayed.
5. Select a channel marked with this sym-
bol.
6. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
7. Select "Play" and press the controller.
Additional information
The name of the channel and additional infor-
mation on the current track are displayed, e.g.
the name of the artist.
1 Artist
2 Track
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Radio
164
Storing channel
1. Select the desired channel.
2. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
3. Select "Store" and press the controller.
"Presets" is displayed.
4. Turn the controller to select a memory posi-
tion and press the controller.
The channel is stored. The stations of the last
selection criterion are displayed again after a
short time.
Changing channel with buttons next to
CD player
Press the button for the corresponding
direction.
The system changes to the next enabled chan-
nel.
Notes
If no signal can be received for more than
4 seconds, a message is displayed on the Con-
trol Display.
Reception may not be possible for certain
reasons, e.g. environmental influences or
topographical conditions. The satellite radio
has no influence on this.
The signal may not be available in tunnels or
underground garages, next to tall buildings,
near trees, mountains or other sources of radio
interference.
Reception is usually possible again as soon as
the signal is available again.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
165
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
CD player and CD changer
Listening to CDs
Compressed audio files*
CDs with compressed audio files, i.e. MP3,
can be played by the CD player, but not by the
CD changer.
CD player: starting CD
With two drives:
The upper drive is for audio CDs.
Insert the CD into the drive with the labeled side
up. The CD is automatically pulled in.
Playback starts automatically if the sound out-
put is on. For CDs with compressed audio files,
it can take up to approx. 1 minute to read in the
data depending on the directory structure.
To start playback when there is already a CD in
the drive:
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to call up
"Entertainment".
3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "CD" is selected and press
the controller.
4. With a CD changer, change to the second
field from the top and turn the controller
until "CD" is selected and press the control-
ler.
The CD player is started.
Playback starts automatically if the sound out-
put is switched on.
Press the button next to CD player.
The CD emerges slightly from the drive.
CD changer: starting CD
Fill the CD magazine and insert, refer to
page 169.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to call up
"Entertainment".
3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "CD" is selected and press
the controller.
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
CD player and CD changer
166
4. Change to the second field from the top if
necessary. Turn the controller until the
desired CD, CD 1 - 6, is selected and press
the controller.
At the end of the last track, the next CD will be
selected.
If the CD magazine has been newly filled, play-
back begins with the lowest CD, e.g. CD 1,
track 1.
The CD magazine's load status is indicated on
the Control Display.
Selecting a track
Buttons next to CD player
Press the button for the corresponding
direction repeatedly until you reach the desired
track.
The CD will start to play at the start of the track.
The track is displayed on the Control Display.
You can also change the track with buttons on
the steering wheel, refer to page 11.
Via iDrive
Select a track by turning the controller.
Compressed audio files*
1. Select the directory if necessary and press
the controller.
2. Select the track and press the controller.
To change the directory:
Select the directory and press the controller.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Displaying information on track*
With compressed audio files, you can display
possibly included information about the current
track, e.g. the name of the artist.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
167
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Details" and press the controller.
The information about the current track is dis-
played.
From radio readiness, the setting for the remote
control used at the moment is saved.
Sampling tracks, scan
The system automatically plays a brief sample
from each of the tracks on the current CD.
1. Select "Set" and press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
2. Select "Scan" and press the controller.
To end sampling:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Scan" and press the controller.
This cancels sampling of the tracks, and the
player remains on the current track.
Compressed audio files*
1. Select the current track and press the con-
troller.
2. Select the desired menu item:
> To sample all tracks of the current direc-
tory, select "Scan directory" and press
the controller.
> To sample all tracks of the CD, select
"Scan all" and press the controller.
To end scan search:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Scan directory" or "Scan all" and
press the controller.
This cancels the scan search and the player
remains on the current track.
Repeating track
1. Select "Set" and press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
CD player and CD changer
168
2. Select "Repeat" and press the controller.
The current track on the CD is repeated.
To cancel repeat mode:
1. Press the controller again.
2. Select "Repeat" and press the controller.
Compressed audio files*
1. Select the current track and press the con-
troller.
2. Select the desired menu item:
> To repeat the selected track, select
"Repeat track" and press the controller.
> To repeat all tracks of the current direc-
tory, select "Repeat directory" and press
the controller.
To cancel repeat mode:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Repeat track" or "Repeat directory"
and press the controller.
Random play sequence
In this mode, the tracks on the current CD are
played once in a random sequence.
1. Select "Set" and press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
2. Select "Random" and press the controller.
To cancel random mode:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Random" and press the controller.
Compressed audio files*
1. Select the current track and press the con-
troller.
2. Select the desired menu item:
> To play all tracks of the current directory
in random order, select "Random direc-
tory" and press the controller.
> To play all tracks of the CD in random
order, select "Random all" and press the
controller.
To cancel random mode:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Random directory" or "Random all"
and press the controller.
Fast forward/reverse
Buttons next to CD player:
Press and hold the button for the corre-
sponding direction.
CD magazine
The BMW CD changer for six CDs is installed in
the glove compartment.
Removing CD magazine
To insert CDs into the CD magazine 1 or
remove them from it, you must first remove the
magazine from the CD changer:
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
169
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Press button 2 to eject the CD magazine 1.
Wait at least 2 seconds before pushing in the
magazine again so that the inserted CDs can be
read in again.
Inserting/removing CDs into/from
CD magazine
When inserting or removing CDs, remember to
hold them only by their edges, taking care to
avoid touching the reflective CD memory sur-
face.
To insert:
Insert one CD into each compartment of the
magazine with the labeled side up.
To remove:
Pull out the desired tray and remove the CD.
Inserting CD magazine
Push in the CD magazine as far as possible in
the direction of the arrow.
The CD changer automatically reads in the
inserted CDs and is then ready for operation.
Notes
BMW CD/DVD players and changers are
officially designated Class 1 laser prod-
ucts. Do not operate if the cover is damaged,
otherwise severe eye damage can result.
Do not use self-recorded CDs with adhesive
labels as these can come loose during playback
due to heat build-up and cause irreparable
damage to the system.
Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard
diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play CDs/
DVDs with an adapter, e.g. Single-CDs, other-
wise the CDs or the adapter can jam and may no
longer be ejected.
Do not use a combined CD/DVD, e.g. DVD
Plus
;
otherwise, the CD/DVD can jam and will no
longer eject.<
General malfunctions
BMW CD/DVD changers and players have been
optimized for performance in vehicles. In some
instances they may be more sensitive to faulty
CDs/DVDs than stationary devices would be.
If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check
whether it has been inserted correctly.
Humidity
High levels of humidity can lead to condensa-
tion on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens and
temporarily prevent playback.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
CD player and CD changer
170
Malfunctions with individual CDs/DVDs
If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs/
DVDs, this can be due to one of the following
causes.
Home-recorded CDs/DVDs
Possible reasons for malfunctions with self-
recorded CDs/DVDs are, e.g., inconsistent
data-creation or recording processes, or poor
quality or advanced age of the CD/DVD blank.
Label CDs/DVDs only on the top, using a marker
designed for this purpose.
Damaged CDs/DVDs
Avoid fingerprints dust, scratches, and mois-
ture.
Keep CDs/DVDs in a sleeve.
Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures over
1227/50 6, high levels of humidity or direct
sunlight.
CDs/DVDs with copy protection
Manufacturers often provide CDs/DVDs with
copy protection. This can mean that some CDs/
DVDs cannot be played or can only be played to
a limited extent.
Care
If necessary, clean the reflective scanning side
of the CDs/DVDs with a commercially available
cleaning cloth by wiping in straight lines from
the center outward.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
171
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
AUX-In connection
You can connect an external audio device, e.g.
an MP3 player, and play the sound via the vehi-
cle loudspeakers. The sound can be adjusted
via iDrive.
Connecting
For audio playback via the vehicle loudspeak-
ers, connect the headphones or the line-out
connection of the device to the socket 1 with a
1/8 in/3,5 mm jack plug.
Starting audio playback
The audio device must be switched on.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to call up
"Entertainment".
3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "AUX" is selected and press
the controller.
4. Select "AUX" and press the controller.
5. Adjust volume and sound if necessary.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Communications
This chapter summarizes how to operate
your mobile phone using iDrive or voice control
and how to use BMW Assist or TeleService.
Communications
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Telephoning
174
Telephoning
The concept
Your BMW is equipped with a full mobile phone
preparation package. After a suitable mobile
phone has been paired in the vehicle once, you
can operate the mobile phone via iDrive, with
the buttons on the steering wheel and by voice.
A mobile phone that has been paired once is
automatically detected again as soon as it is
brought back inside the vehicle, provided that
the engine is running or the ignition is switched
on. The pairing data of up to four mobile phones
can be stored simultaneously. If several mobile
phones are detected simultaneously, the most
recently paired mobile phone can be operated
via the vehicle.
Using a phone in your vehicle
Using snap-in adapter*
The so-called snap-in adapter, a mobile phone
cradle, enables the battery to be charged and
the mobile phone to be connected to the exter-
nal antenna of your vehicle. This ensures
improved network reception and a consistent
voice reproduction quality. Ask your BMW cen-
ter which mobile phones will fit in the snap-in
adapters they offer.
BMW discourages the use of mobile
phones or other mobile communications
devices inside the vehicle without a direct con-
nection to an outside antenna. Otherwise, the
vehicle electronics and mobile communication
device can interfere with each other. In addition,
there is no assurance that the radiation that
results from transmission will be dissipated
from the vehicle interior.<
For your safety
A car phone makes life more convenient in
many ways, and can even save lives in an emer-
gency. While you should consult your mobile
phone's separate operating instructions for a
detailed description of safety precautions and
information, we request that you direct your
particular attention to the following:
Only make entries when the traffic situa-
tion allows you to do so. Do not hold the
mobile phone in your hand while you are driving;
use the hands-free system instead. If you do
not observe this precaution, your being dis-
tracted can endanger vehicle occupants and
other road users.<
Suitable mobile phones
Ask your BMW center which mobile phones
with a Bluetooth interface are supported by the
mobile phone preparation package or which
mobile phones will fit in the snap-in adapters
they offer. These mobile phones support the
functions described in this Owner's Manual,
provided they are running a certain software
version. Malfunctions can occur with other
mobile phones.
Care instructions
You can find what you need to know about car-
ing for your mobile phone in the separate Caring
for your vehicle brochure and in the mobile
phone operating instructions.
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
175
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Operating options
You can operate the mobile phone
*
using:
> Buttons on steering wheel, refer to page 11
> iDrive, refer to page 16
> Voice commands, refer to page 185
A mobile phone detected by the vehicle should
not be operated by the mobile phone's keypad;
otherwise malfunctions may occur.
Placing phone calls with BMW Assist
system*: BMW Assist calls
You can use the BMW Assist system via the
hands-free unit for BMW Assist calls.
When the status information "BMW Assist" or
"BMW Service" is displayed in "Communica-
tion", only BMW Assist calls are possible.
It may not be possible to establish a telephone
connection using the mobile phone while a con-
nection is being established to BMW Assist
or while a call to BMW Assist is already in
progress. If this happens, you must unpair the
mobile phone and the vehicle if you wish to
place a call with the mobile phone.
Initial operation
Pairing mobile phone in vehicle
The following prerequisites must be met:
> Suitable mobile phone: the mobile phone is
supported by the full mobile phone prepara-
tion package. Information on this subject is
also provided on the Internet at:
www.bmw.com
> The mobile phone is ready to operate.
> The Bluetooth links of the vehicle, refer to
page 179, and the mobile phone are active.
> Depending on the mobile phone, presets in
the mobile phone are required: e.g. via the
following menu items:
> Bluetooth activated
> Connection not with confirmation
> Reconnect
> Depending on the mobile phone model, the
setting energy saving mode can, for exam-
ple, result in vehicle failing to detect the
paired mobile phone.
> Specify any desired number as the Blue-
tooth passkey, e.g. 1, for pairing. This Blue-
tooth passkey is no longer required follow-
ing successful pairing.
> The ignition is switched on.
Only pair the mobile phone with the vehi-
cle stopped; otherwise you may become
distracted and inadvertently endanger your
passengers and other road users.<
Switching on ignition
1. Insert the remote control as far as possible
into the ignition lock.
2. Switch on the ignition by pressing the Start/
Stop button without depressing the brake
or clutch pedal.
Preparation with iDrive
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
3. Press the button to open the start
menu.
4. Press the controller to open the menu.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Telephoning
176
5. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
6. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.
7. Change into the second field from the top,
select "Phone" and press the controller.
8. Select "Pair new phone" and press the con-
troller.
9. Select "Start pairing" and press the control-
ler.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis-
played.
Preparation with mobile phone
10. Additional operations must be carried out
on the mobile phone and differ depending
on the model, refer to the operating instruc-
tions of your mobile phone, e.g. find, con-
nect or pair under Bluetooth device. The
Bluetooth name of the vehicle is also shown
on the mobile phone display.
11. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on
the mobile phone display.
Pairing
Depending on your mobile phone, you will first
be requested consecutively via the display of
your mobile phone or iDrive to enter the Blue-
tooth passkey you specified.
12. Enter the Bluetooth passkey.
Depending on the mobile phone, approx.
30 seconds are available for entering the
Bluetooth passkey on the mobile phone
and on the Control Display.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
177
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
13. Change into the third field from the top,
select "Confirm passkey" and press the
controller.
14. Wait a few seconds until the "Communica-
tion" menu appears.
The next time you use the mobile phone in the
vehicle interior, it will be detected within a max-
imum of 2 minutes with the engine running or
the ignition switched on.
With some mobile phone models it may
be necessary to make certain settings for
a permanent Bluetooth link, e.g. via the menu
item Authorization or Secure connection. Refer
to the operating instructions of your mobile
phone.<
As soon as a mobile phone is detected by the
vehicle, the phone book entries stored on the
SIM card or on your mobile phone are trans-
mitted to your vehicle. This transmission is
dependent on your mobile phone, refer to the
operating instructions of your mobile phone if
necessary, and can take several minutes.
If not all phone book entries are displayed:
> Transfer all phone book entries from the
SIM card to the mobile phone if necessary.
> It may not be possible to display phone
book entries with special characters.
Up to four mobile phones can be paired consec-
utively. When you pair a fifth mobile phone, the
pairing data of the mobile phone for which the
pairing data were stored first in the vehicle will
be deleted.
Check if pairing is unsuccessful
> Is the mobile phone supported by the
mobile phone preparation package? Infor-
mation on this subject is also provided on
the Internet at: www.bmw.com.
> Do the Bluetooth passkey on the mobile
phone and the vehicle match? The same
Bluetooth passkey must be entered both on
the mobile phone display and via iDrive.
> Have you required longer than 30 seconds
to enter the Bluetooth passkey?
> Only a limited number of devices can be
connected to the mobile phone. Delete the
connection to other devices if necessary.
> The mobile phone no longer reacts? Switch
the mobile phone off and then on again or
disconnect the power supply.
To repeat pairing:
1. Select "Restart pairing" and press the con-
troller.
2. Repeat steps 9 to 14.
If pairing was repeatedly unsuccessful, contact
the BMW Hotline.
To call the BMW Hotline:
Select "Help" and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Telephoning
178
The phone number of the BMW Hotline and
information required for pairing is shown on the
display. With mobile phones already paired, you
can select the phone number of the BMW Hot-
line to establish the connection.
List of paired mobile phones
The mobile phones for which the vehicle has
stored the pairing data can be displayed. If sev-
eral paired mobile phones are detected by the
vehicle simultaneously, you can operate the
mobile phone highest up in the list via the vehi-
cle.
You can change the order of the mobile phones
in the list. As long as a mobile phone is selected
in this list, the mobile phones cannot be oper-
ated via the vehicle.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button to open the start
menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.
5. Change into the second field from the top,
select "Phone" and press the controller.
6. Select the desired mobile phone.
With two drives:
> Move the controller to the rear to change
into the bottom field.
> Select the desired mobile phone and
press the controller.
With a single drive:
> Select the desired mobile phone and
press the controller.
7. Select "Move device up" and press the con-
troller.
The selected mobile phone is moved
upward by one position.
Unpairing mobile phone from vehicle
If you no longer want to operate a mobile phone
via the vehicle, you can delete the pairing data
of the mobile phone.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Switch off the mobile phone.
2. Press the button to open the start
menu.
3. Press the controller to open the menu.
4. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
5. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.
"Bluetooth" is selected.
6. Change into the second field from the top,
select "Phone" and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
179
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
7. Select the desired mobile phone.
With two drives:
> Move the controller to the rear to change
into the bottom field.
> Select the desired mobile phone and
press the controller.
With a single drive:
> Select the desired mobile phone and
press the controller.
8. Select "Delete device" and press the con-
troller.
The unpaired mobile phone is deleted from
the list.
The phone book entries and the lists of
stored phone numbers are also deleted.
Activating/deactivating Bluetooth link
Bluetooth technology is not approved in
all countries. Observe the applicable local
regulations. Temporarily deactivate the Blue-
tooth link between the vehicle and the mobile
phone if necessary.
If the Bluetooth link is deactivated, you cannot
operate your mobile phone via the vehicle and
the mobile phone can use other devices with a
Bluetooth interface, e.g. a laptop computer.<
To temporarily deactivate the Bluetooth link
between your vehicle and your mobile phone:
1. Remove the mobile phone from the cradle
and switch it off.
2. Press the button to open the start
menu.
3. Press the controller to open the menu.
4. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
5. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.
6. Change into the second field from the top,
select "Settings" and press the controller.
7. Select "Bluetooth communication active"
and press the controller to activate or deac-
tivate the link.
The Bluetooth link is activated.
The Bluetooth link is deactivated.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Telephoning
180
Adjusting volume
Turn the knob during a call to select the desired
volume.
This volume for the hands-free system is main-
tained, even if the other audio sources are set to
minimum volume.
You can also adjust the volume with the buttons
on the steering wheel, refer to page 11.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Operation via iDrive
You can operate the following functions via
iDrive:
> Accepting/rejecting a call
> Dialing phone numbers
> Dialing phone numbers from the phone
book
> Dialing stored phone numbers, e.g. from the
list of accepted calls
> Ending a call
When the ignition and radio readiness are
switched off, e.g. after removing the remote
control from the ignition lock, you can continue
an ongoing call via the hands-free system for no
more than 25 minutes.
Speech quality
If the person you are talking to cannot under-
stand you well, this may be due to excessively
loud background noises. The full mobile phone
preparation package can compensate for these
noises to a certain degree.
To optimize the speech quality during a call,
we recommend that you:
> Reduce background noises, e.g. by closing
the windows, reducing the air volume of the
automatic climate control or pointing the
opened front vent outlets downward.
> Reduce the volume of the hands-free sys-
tem.
Requirements
> The pairing data of the mobile phone are
stored in the vehicle and the mobile phone
is ready to operate.
> The engine is running or the ignition is
switched on.
> The mobile phone is detected by the vehi-
cle.
Opening Communication
You operate many of the functions described in
the following via the "Communication" menu.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button to open the start
menu.
2. Move the controller forward to open "Com-
munication".
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
181
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Receiving calls
If you have the phone number of the caller
stored in the phone book and the phone num-
ber has been transmitted, the name of the entry
is displayed.
Accepting a call
Press the button on the steering wheel.
Alternative:
"Accept" is selected.
Press the controller.
Rejecting a call
Select "Reject" and press the controller.
The caller is diverted to your mailbox if it has
been activated.
Calling
Dialing phone numbers
1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.
2. Select "Dial" and press the controller.
3. Enter the desired phone number by dialing
the individual digits and pressing the con-
troller.
Always enter the complete phone number
consisting of national dialing code, area
code, and phone number.
The letters correspond to the digits on the
keypad of the mobile phone.
To delete the last digit:
Move the controller toward the right to
select the arrow and press the control-
ler down.
4. Select "Dial number" and press the control-
ler.
Alternative:
Press the button on the steering wheel.
For your phone number to be displayed to the
person you are calling, the display of phone
numbers must be enabled by your service pro-
vider.
Ending call
Press the button on the steering wheel.
Alternative:
1. Select the phone number and press the
controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Telephoning
182
2. "End call" is selected:
Press the controller.
Dialing a phone number from phone
book or a phone number stored in a list
Phone numbers you have called, incoming calls
and the entries of the phone book are stored in
lists when the mobile phone is connected to the
vehicle via Bluetooth. If the caller is entered in
the phone book, the name of the entry is dis-
played instead of the phone number.
You can select the desired subscriber from the
list and establish the connection.
Five lists are available:
> "A - Z"
The entries of the mobile-phone phone
book, consisting of the name and phone
number, are sorted alphabetically.
> "Top 8"
The eight numbers called most frequently
from the phone book "A - Z" are automati-
cally stored in the Top 8 list.
> "Redial"
The last eight phone numbers you have
dialed are automatically stored. The last
number dialed is at the top of the list.
> "Missed calls"
The phone numbers of the last eight calls
which were not accepted are stored. This
requires the telephone number of the caller
to have been sent.
> "Received calls"
The phone numbers of the last eight
accepted calls are stored. This requires the
telephone number of the caller to have been
sent.
Dialing phone numbers from phone
book
The list "A - Z" is available for you phone book
entries. The phone book entries appear on the
Control Display.
1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.
2. Select "A - Z" and press the controller.
3. To limit the number of displayed entries,
select the first letter of the desired entry and
press the controller.
4. Select the desired entry and press the con-
troller.
5. Select "Call" and press the controller.
The system dials the number.
If different phone numbers are stored in the
mobile phone under one name, e.g. office and
home, the name is shown once for each phone
number.
You can change a phone number stored in the
phone book, e.g. to call a specific extension:
1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.
2. Select "A - Z" and press the controller.
3. Select the desired entry and press the con-
troller.
4. Select "Add digits" and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
183
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
5. Change the phone number.
6. Select "Dial number" and press the control-
ler.
Dialing a phone number stored in a list
To select an entry and establish a connection:
1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.
2. Select list and press the controller:
> "Top 8"
> "Redial"
> "Missed calls"
> "Received calls"
3. Select the desired entry and press the con-
troller.
4. Select "Call" and press the controller.
The system dials the number.
Deleting individual entries
1. Select the desired entry from the list and
press the controller.
2. Select "Delete" and press the controller.
The entry is deleted.
Deleting entire list
1. Select an entry from the list and press the
controller.
2. Select "Delete all numbers" and press the
controller.
3. If applicable, select "Yes" and press the
controller.
The list is deleted.
BMW Contact*
If you have not enabled BMW Assist, you can
have several service numbers displayed:
> Roadside Assistance
*
of the BMW Group
when you require breakdown assistance
> BMW center, e.g. when you want to make
an appointment for service
> BMW Customer Relations
*
for information
on all aspects of your vehicle
If BMW Assist is enabled, refer to page 189.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Telephoning
184
You can dial the displayed service phone num-
bers if your mobile phone is paired in the vehi-
cle:
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller forwards to select
"Communication".
3. Select "BMW Contact" and press the con-
troller.
4. Select "BMW Contact Numbers" and press
the controller.
5. Select one of the following menu items and
press the controller:
> "Roadside Assistance"
> "Customer Relations"
> "Service Request"
6. Select "Call" and press the controller.
Contact is established.
Transferring phone number via tone
dialing method
The tone dialing method is required for access
to network services or for controlling devices,
e.g. remote checking of an answering machine.
This function is available when a connection
has been established.
1. Establish connection.
2. With a single drive:
Press the controller.
Select "Keypad" and press the controller.
With two drives:
Move the controller backwards until the
bottom field is selected.
3. Select the desired character
and press the
controller.
Each character is sent immediately and
confirmed by a tone depending on the
mobile phone model.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
185
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Changing between mobile
phone and hands-free system
From mobile phone to hands-free
system
You can continue calls begun outside the Blue-
tooth range of the vehicle via the hands-free
system when the engine is running or the igni-
tion is switched on. Depending on your mobile
phone, the system automatically switches over
to the hands-free mode.
For mobile phones that do not automatically
switch over to the hands-free mode:
> Depending on the mobile phone model
used, the conversation can be continued via
the hands-free system if necessary. Follow
the instructions displayed on the mobile
phone display, refer to the operating
instructions of your mobile phone.
> Press the button above the storage
compartment. Switching over may take
several seconds.
From hands-free system to mobile
phone
When you telephone via the hands-free system,
you can also continue the call via the mobile
phone if necessary, depending on the mobile
phone model. Act according to what is shown
on the mobile phone display, refer to the oper-
ating instructions of your mobile phone.
As an alternative, you can deactivate the Blue-
tooth link.
Depending on your mobile phone model, poor
reception of the wireless communications net-
work can result in the system switching from
the hands-free system to the mobile phone.
Operation by voice*
The concept
You can operate your mobile phone without
having to remove your hands from the steering
wheel. When making your entries, you will be
supported by announcements or questions in
many cases.
The same prerequisites as for operation via
iDrive apply, refer to page 180.
Voice commands
Activating system
1. Briefly press the button on the steering
wheel.
An acoustic signal indicates that you can
say commands.
2. Say the command.
Ending/canceling operation by voice
Press the button on the steering wheel
or
In dialogs where text is spoken, not a command,
e.g. a name, canceling is only possible using the
button on the steering wheel.
Having possible commands read aloud
The system understands default commands
that must be spoken word for word.
You can have the system read aloud the possi-
ble commands at any point:
Using alternative commands
There are often a number of commands to run a
function, e.g.:
The system recognizes digits from zero to nine.
You can say each digit individually or group
them into a sequence to accelerate the input.
{Cancel}.
{Help}.
{Dial name} or {Name}.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Telephoning
186
Example: dialing phone numbers
Start the dialog:
Press the button on the steering wheel.
Setting volume of instructions
You can adjust the volume for the instructions
from the system:
Turn the knob during instructions.
This volume for the instructions is maintained,
even if the other audio sources are set to mini-
mum volume.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Calling
Dialing phone numbers
The connection to the desired subscriber is
established.
Correcting phone number
After the last spoken sequence of digits has
been repeated by the system, you can delete
this sequence of digits.
The command {Correct number} can be
repeated as often as you like.
Deleting phone number
All digits entered up to this point are deleted.
Voice phone book
Operating by voice requires a personal voice
phone book.
> With combined drives for audio CDs and
navigation DVDs, the entries are automati-
cally adopted from your mobile phone's
memory.
> With a single drive, the entries must be
entered by voice and are independent of
your mobile phone's memory. In this case, it
is not possible to use voice command either
to call phone numbers stored in the mobile
phone or to store new numbers.
You say The voice control answers
{Dial number}{{Please say the number}}
e.g. {123 456 7890} Depending on equipment:
{{123 456 7890. Continue?}} or
{{123 456 7890. And next?}}
{Dial}{{Dialing number}}
1. {Dial number}.
2. Say the phone number.
For telephone calls abroad, say {Plus}
and then the country code.
3. {Dial}.
{Correct number}.
The digits are deleted.
{Delete}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
187
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Creating and editing voice phone
book*
Save entry:
An entry always consists of a name and phone
number.
Delete entry:
You can delete any entry from the voice phone
book.
Delete all entries:
{Delete phone book} deletes all entries in the
phone book.
Have entries read aloud and dial:
You can have all the entries of your voice phone
book read aloud in the order of input and select
a certain entry to establish a connection:
Selecting an entry
The connection to the phone number of the
selected entry is established.
Redialing
The {Redial} command calls up "Redial".
Notes
Important for voice commands
For voice commands, keep the following in
mind:
> Issue the commands smoothly and at nor-
mal volume, avoiding excessive emphasis
and pauses.
> Keep the doors, windows and glass sunroof
closed to prevent interference from ambi-
ent noise.
> Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
Mounting/removing snap-in
adapter
1. Press the area 1 around the button and
remove the cover.
1. {Save name}.
2. Say the name.
The spoken length of the names in the
phone book must not exceed approx.
2seconds.
3. Say the phone number after being
requested to do so by the system.
4. To store the phone number:
{Save}.
1. {Delete name}.
The dialog for deleting an entry is
opened.
2. Say the name when prompted.
3. Confirm the prompt with {Yes}.
1. {Delete phone book}.
The dialog for deleting phone book is
opened.
2. Confirm the prompt with {Yes}.
3. Confirm the repeated prompt with
{Yes}.
1. {Read phone book}.
The dialog for reading phone book is
opened.
2. {Dial number} when the desired entry is
read aloud.
1. {Dial name}.
The dialog for selecting an entry is
opened.
2. Say the name when prompted.
3. Confirm the prompt with {Yes}.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Telephoning
188
2. Insert the snap-in adapter at the front and
press down until it engages.
To remove the snap-in adapter:
Press the area 1 around the button.
Inserting mobile phone
1. Remove the protective cap from the mobile
phone's antenna connector if necessary, so
that the mobile phone can engage in the
snap-in adapter.
2. With the buttons facing upward, press the
mobile phone toward the electrical connec-
tions and press down until it engages.
From radio readiness or with the steering
unlocked the mobile phone's battery is
charged.
To protect the vehicle's batteries, avoid
using the phone when the ignition is
switched off.<
Removing mobile phone
Press button.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
189
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
BMW Assist
BMW Assist provides you with various services.
For example, the position data of your vehicle
can be transmitted to the BMW Assist
Response Center if an emergency call
*
has
been initiated.
Many BMW Assist services depend on the indi-
vidually agreed contract.
After your contract has expired, the BMW
Assist system will be deactivated by the BMW
Assist Response Center without you having to
visit a BMW center. Following the deactivation
of the BMW Assist systems, no BMW Assist
service is available. The BMW Assist system be
reactivated by a BMW center after signing a
new contract.
Requirements
You can use BMW Assist when the following
requirements are met:
> The installed BMW Assist system is logged
in on a mobile phone network. This network
must be capable of transmitting the ser-
vices.
> To transmit position data, the vehicle must
be able to determine the current position.
> A GPS signal must be available in order for
BMW Assist to be activated and updated.
> You have placed an order for the BMW
Assist service contract at a BMW center or
BMW Assist Response Center and signed
the service contract. Enabling must have
been completed.
> BMW Assist is activated, refer to page 194.
Services offered
The following services are available via
BMW Assist:
> Emergency call, refer to page 217:
When you press the SOS button, a connec-
tion is established to the BMW Assist
Response Center. The BMW Assist
Response Center contacts you and
arranges for further steps to help you.
> Automatic emergency call:
Under certain conditions a connection is
established to the BMW Assist Response
Center directly following a serious accident.
If possible, the BMW Assist Response Cen-
ter then contacts you and arranges for fur-
ther steps to help you.
> Roadside Assistance:
You can call Roadside Assistance
*
of the
BMW Group should you require help in the
event of a breakdown. If possible, the vehi-
cle and position data are transmitted in the
process.
> BMW Customer Relations:
For information related to your vehicle, call
BMW Customer Relations.
> TeleService:
Data on your vehicle's service status or nec-
essary inspections are transmitted to your
BMW center either automatically before a
service due date or when you request a
BMW service appointment.
> Unlocking vehicle:
Inform the BMW Assist Response Center,
e.g. if your remote control is not available
and you want to have the vehicle unlocked.
> Vehicle search:
After your vehicle has been reported to the
police as stolen, the BMW Assist Response
Center can locate its position. To do this,
the vehicle electronics must be ready for
operation.
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
BMW Assist
190
In addition, you can be provided with other ser-
vices, e.g. the information service or informa-
tion on route planning, the traffic situation and
the weather.
Press the SOS button to contact the BMW
Assist Response Center, see below.
You also have access to the BMW Assist infor-
mation service via the Internet.
Special features of services offered
The following special features apply to the ser-
vices:
> The services offered are country-specific.
> Voice contact is established or data are
transferred, depending on the equipment
and the country. In some countries, it is
possible to do both.
> The data transmitted can, for example, be
the vehicle data, your current position or the
data of the CBS Condition Based Service.
Using services
Contacting BMW Assist Response
Center
You can contact the BMW Assist Response
Center with the SOS button.
1. Briefly press protective cover to open.
With some vehicle equipment packages or
in the Convertible, the arrangement of the
switches and indicator lamps may differ
somewhat.
2. Press the button for at least 2 seconds.
The BMW Assist Response Center is con-
tacted.
Breakdown assistance
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller forwards to select
"Communication".
3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "BMW Assist" is selected
and press the controller.
4. Select "Roadside Assistance" and press
the controller.
If the location can be determined, the cur-
rent vehicle position is displayed.
5. Select "Start service" and press the con-
troller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
191
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
The BMW Assist Response Center will connect
you to the Roadside Assistance of the
BMW Group.
TeleService
Automatic service notification*
The data on the service status of your vehicle or
on necessary inspections is transmitted auto-
matically prior to the due date. You can check
when the BMW center was notified.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Info sources" and press the control-
ler.
4. Select "Service" and press the controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Service requirements" is
selected and press the controller.
6. Select "Service notification" and press the
controller.
Manual service notification
You can transmit data on the service status of
your vehicle to your BMW center if you want to
make an appointment for service.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller forwards to select
"Communication".
3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "BMW Assist" is selected
and press the controller.
4. Select "Service Request".
5. Press the controller.
6. Select "Start service" and press the con-
troller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
BMW Assist
192
The data relevant for service are transmitted.
Your BMW center will contact you to set up an
appointment for service.
Contacting BMW Customer Relations
For information on all aspects of your vehicle,
you can contact BMW Customer Relations.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller forwards to select
"Communication".
3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "BMW Assist" is selected
and press the controller.
4. Select "Customer Relations".
5. Press the controller.
6. Select "Start service" and press the con-
troller.
You are connected to BMW Customer Rela-
tions by the BMW Assist Response Center.
Information service*
When you call the information service of
BMW Assist, you can, for example, obtain infor-
mation on current events, filling stations or
hotels and have their phone numbers and
addresses transmitted. Reservations can be
made at many hotels directly by the BMW infor-
mation service.
The information service must be enabled sepa-
rately by the BMW Assist Response Center.
Calling up information
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller forwards to select
"Communication".
3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "BMW Assist" is selected
and press the controller.
4. Select "Concierge" and press the control-
ler.
5. Select "Start Service" and press the con-
troller.
The BMW Assist Response Center will connect
you to the information service.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
193
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Displaying transmitted data
Select the received message if necessary and
press the controller.
Dialing phone number or adopting
address in destination guidance
1. Select "Options" and press the controller.
2. Select a menu item:
> With "Call" you can establish a telephone
connection. This requires your Bluetooth
mobile phone to be paired in the vehicle.
> With "Select as destination" you can adopt
the address in the destination guidance of
the navigation system.
Updating BMW Assist
Displaying and updating services
You will be notified of any changes in the ser-
vices offered by BMW Assist. In this case you
should update the services.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "BMW Service set-
tings" is selected and press the controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Service Status" is selected
and press the controller.
The current services available from BMW
Assist are displayed.
6. If applicable, select "Options" and press the
controller.
7. Select "Update services" and press the
controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
BMW Assist
194
Blocking services*
If you block the services, the connection to
BMW Assist is deactivated.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "BMW Service set-
tings" is selected and press the controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Service Status" is selected
and press the controller.
6. Select "Options" and press the controller.
7. Select "Terminate services" and press the
controller.
The use of BMW Assist is blocked, and the cur-
rent vehicle position will not be transmitted dur-
ing an emergency call
*
. To cancel blocking and
reactivate BMW Assist, see below. This does
not affect the contractual agreements.
Reactivate BMW Assist if necessary to log on
again.
Activating BMW Assist
For you to be able to use the services of
BMW Assist, BMW Assist must be activated.
Requirements
> Make sure that the vehicle can determine its
current position. Reception is best when
you have an unobstructed view to the sky.
> Leave radio readiness switched on while
connecting to the system.
Activating
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
195
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
4. Turn the controller until "BMW Service set-
tings" is selected and press the controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Service Status" is selected
and press the controller.
6. Select "Enable services" and press the con-
troller.
BMW Assist is activated and the data
exchange with the BMW Assist Response
Center begins.
Activation takes a few minutes. The status is
displayed on the Control Display. If you open
another menu, the activation process continues
to run in the background.
Displaying vehicle data
When BMW Assist is activated, the license
plate and the vehicle identification number of
your vehicle can be displayed.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "BMW Service settings" and press
the controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Profile" is selected and
press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Mobility
This section helps you maintain your
mobility by supplying important information
on vital topics including fuels and lubricants,
wheels and tires, service, maintenance
and breakdown assistance.
Mobility
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Refueling
198
Refueling
Switch off the engine before refueling,
otherwise no fuel can be filled into the
tank and a message is displayed.<
When handling fuel, always observe all
applicable precautionary measures and
regulations. Never transport reserve fuel con-
tainers in the vehicle. They can leak and cause
an explosion or a fire in an accident.<
Fuel filler door
To open and close: briefly press the rear edge of
the fuel filler door.
Unlocking manually
In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can
release the fuel filler door manually:
In the luggage compartment, pull the knob with
the gas pump symbol on the right side panel.
Observe the following when refueling
When handling fuels always follow any
safety guidelines posted at the gas sta-
tion.<
Place the fuel filler cap in the bracket attached
to the fuel filler door.
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle com-
pletely into the filler pipe. Avoid raising the filler
nozzle during refueling, otherwise this
> results in premature pump shutoff
> can lead to reduced efficiency in the fuel-
vapor recovery system
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Fuel tank capacity
Approx. 18.5 US gal/70 liters, including the
reserve capacity of approx. 2.6 US gal/10 liters.
Refuel as soon as possible once your
cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km, otherwise engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<
Fuel filler cap
Closing
Insert the cap and turn it clockwise until there is
a clearly audible click.
Do not jam the strap attached to the fuel
filler cap between the fuel filler cap and
the vehicle. A message
*
is displayed if the cap
is loose or missing.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Mobility
199
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Fuel specifications
Never used leaded gasoline; it will perma-
nently damage the catalytic converter.
Do not use E85, i.e. fuel that consists of 85%
ethanol, or Flex Fuel. Otherwise permanent
damage to the engine and the fuel supply sys-
tem will result.<
Required fuel
Super Premium Gasoline/AKI 91
This gasoline is highly recommended.
However, you may also use gasoline with less
AKI. The minimum AKI rating is 87.
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI rat-
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
when starting at high outside temperatures.
This has no affect on the engine life.
Do not use gasoline below the specified
minimum quality, otherwise engine dam-
age can result.<
Use high-quality brands
Field experience has demonstrated significant
differences in fuel quality: volatility, composi-
tion, additives, etc., among gasolines offered for
sale in the United States and Canada. Fuels
containing up to and including 10% ethanol or
other oxygenates with up to 2.8% oxygen by
weight, that is, 15% MTBE or 3% methanol
plus an equivalent amount of co-solvent, will
not void the applicable warranties with respect
to defects in materials or workmanship.
The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
problems relating to drivability and start-
ing, and to a tendency to stall, especially under
certain environmental conditions such as high
ambient temperature and high altitude.
Should you encounter drivability problems
which you suspect could be related to the fuel
you are using, we recommend that you respond
by switching to a recognized high-quality brand
such as gasoline that is advertised as Top Tier
Detergent Gasoline.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may also result in unscheduled maintenance.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
200
Wheels and tires
Tire inflation pressure
Information for your safety
The condition of the tires and the maintenance
of the specified tire pressure are crucial not only
to the tire's service life, but also to driving com-
fort and most importantly, driving safety.
Checking pressure
Only check tire inflation pressure when the tires
are cold. This means after a maximum of
1.25 miles/2 km driving or when the vehicle has
been parked for at least 2 hours. When tires are
warm, the tire inflation pressure increases.
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly
and correct it as needed: at least twice a
month and before starting long trips. Other-
wise, driving instability or tire damage, and
therefore accidents, can result from incorrect
tire inflation pressures.<
After correcting the tire inflation pressure,
reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to
page 90, or reset the Tire Pressure Monitor,
refer to page 92.<
Pressure specifications
The tables below provide all the correct inflation
pressures for the specified tire sizes at ambient
temperature.
The inflation pressures apply to the tire
sizes and tire brands respectively
approved and recommended by BMW; a list of
these is available from your BMW center.<
For correct identification of the right tire infla-
tion pressure for your tires, observe the follow-
ing:
> Tire sizes for your vehicle
> Load conditions
> Maximum allowable driving speed
Tire inflation pressures for driving
up to 100 mph/160 km/h
For normal driving up to 100 mph/160 km/h,
adjust pressures to the respective tire inflation
pressures listed on the following pages in the
column for traveling speeds up to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h to achieve optimum driving
comfort.
These pressure specifications can be found on
the door post when you open the driver's door.
The permissible top speed for these tire
inflation pressures is 100 mph/160 km/h.
Do not exceed this speed; otherwise, tire dam-
age and accidents may result.<
Tire inflation pressures for driving
above 100 mph/160 km/h
In order to drive at maximum speeds in
excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please
note the tire pressures for speeds exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h listed in the relevant column
of the table on the following pages and adjust
your tire inflation pressures as needed. Other-
wise, tire damage and accidents could occur.<
Observe all national and local maximum speed
limits, otherwise violations of the law could
occur.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Mobility
201
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Tire inflation pressures for 650i Coupe
Tire inflation pressures for 650i Convertible
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds
up to max. of
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications
in the table are indicated in
psi/kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
245/45 R 18 96 V M+S
245/50 R 17 99 H M+S
32/220 33/230 32/220 33/230 33/230 39/270
Front: 245/45 R 18 96 W
Rear: 275/40R1899W
32/220 33/230 32/220 33/230 33/230 39/270
Front: 245/40 R 19 94 W
Rear: 275/35R1996W
32/220 33/230 32/220 33/230 33/230 39/270
Front: 245/35 R 20 91 W
Rear: 275/30R2093Y
32/220 33/230 32/220 33/230 33/230 39/270
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 226.
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds
up to max. of
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications
in the table are indicated in
psi/kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
245/45 R 18 96 V M+S
245/50 R 17 99 H M+S
32/220 38/260 32/220 38/260 39/270 46/320
Front: 245/45 R 18 96 W
Rear: 275/40R1899W
32/220 38/260 32/220 38/260 39/270 46/320
Front: 245/40 R 19 94 W
Rear: 275/35R1996W
32/220 38/260 32/220 38/260 39/270 46/320
Front: 245/35 R 20 91 W
Rear: 275/30R2093Y
32/220 39/270 32/220 38/260 39/270 46/320
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 226.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
202
Tire identification marks
Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the tire
makes it easier to identify and choose the right
tires.
Tire size
Speed letter
T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h
Tire Identification Number
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
the US Department of Transportation.
DOT code:
Tire age
The tire's date of manufacture is indicated on
the sidewall:
DOT ... 3406 indicates that a tire was manufac-
tured in week 34 of the year 2006.
BMW recommends replacing all tires at least
every 6 years, even if some tires may last for
10 years.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Tread wear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
DOT Quality Grades
Tread wear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger car tires must conform to
Federal Safety Requirements in addition
to these grades.<
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov-
ernment test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half, 1γ, times as well on the govern-
ment course as a tire graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm due to varia-
tions in driving habits, service practices and dif-
ferences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C.
These grades represent the tire's ability to stop
on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test sur-
faces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cor-
nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction charac-
teristics.<
e.g.
Nominal width in mm
Aspect ratio in Ξ
Belted construction – radial
Rim diameter in inches
Carrying capacity ID-code
(not in ZR tires)
Speed code letter
(in ZR tires before the R)
245/45 R 18 96 W
e.g.
Manufacturer code
for tire make
Tire size and tire design
Tire age
DOT xxxx xxx 3406
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Mobility
203
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to
a level of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehi-
cle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either sep-
arately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.<
RSC – run-flat tires
You will recognize run-flat tires by a circular
symbol containing the letters RSC on the side
of the tire, refer to page 204.
M+S
Winter and all-season tires.
These have better winter properties than sum-
mer tires.
Tire condition
Inspect your tires frequently for tread wear,
signs of damage and foreign objects lodged in
the tread, and check the tread depth.
Minimum tread depth
The tread depth should not drop below 0.12 in/
3 mm, although, for example, European legisla-
tion only specifies a minimum tread depth of
0.063 in/1.6 mm. At tread depths below 0.12 in/
3 mm, there is an increased risk of high-speed
hydroplaning, even when only small amounts of
water are present on the road surface.
Winter tires noticeably loose their suitability for
winter use below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm.
New tires should be mounted in the interest of
safety.
Wear indicators at the tread-groove base, refer
to arrow, are distributed over the tire's circum-
ference and are marked on the side of the tire
with TWI – Tread Wear Indicator. If the tire tread
has been driven down to the wear indicators, a
tread depth of 0.063 in/1.6 mm has been
reached.
Wheel/tire damage
Please note that low-profile tires cause wheels,
tires and suspension parts to be more suscep-
tible to road hazards and consequential dam-
ages.
Unusual vibrations encountered during normal
vehicle operation can indicate tire failure or
some other vehicle defect. This can, for exam-
ple, be caused by driving over curbs. These
kinds of problems may also be signaled by other
changes in vehicle response, such as a strong
tendency to pull to the left or right.
In these cases reduce your speed imme-
diately and have the wheels and tires
inspected immediately. To do this, carefully
drive to the nearest BMW center or a special-
ized tire dealer that works in accordance with
BMW guidelines and uses appropriately trained
personnel. Have the vehicle towed to the repair
shop if necessary. Tire damage can be
extremely dangerous to vehicle occupants and
other road users.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
204
Run-flat tires
You will recognize run-flat tires by the circular
symbol containing the letters RSC on the side
of the tire.
Run-flat tires consist of self-contained tires and
special rims. The sidewall reinforcement
ensures that the tire retains some residual
safety in the event of pressure drop and driving
remains possible to a restricted degree.
To continue driving with a damaged tire:
> With Flat Tire Monitor, refer to Indication of
a flat tire, page 90
> With Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to Mes-
sage with low tire inflation pressure,
page 92
New wheels and tires
Only have new wheels and tires mounted
by a BMW center or a repair shop that
works in accordance with BMW guidelines and
uses appropriately trained personnel. If this
work is performed inexpertly, there is a danger
of damage and associated safety risks. Make
sure that the new wheels are balanced.<
Retreaded tires
BMW does not recommend the use of
retreaded tires; otherwise, driving safety
may be reduced. Potentially substantial varia-
tions in the design and the age of the carcasses
can result in a reduced service life.<
The right wheels and tires
BMW recommends that you use only
wheel and tire combinations that BMW
has tested and approved for your particular
vehicle. Variations in factors such as manufac-
turing tolerances mean that even wheels and
tires with identical official size ratings could
actually have different dimensions than the
approved units – these differences could lead to
body contact, and with it the risk of severe acci-
dents. If non-approved wheels and tires are
used, BMW cannot evaluate their suitability,
and therefore cannot be held liable for driving
safety.<
You can find out the right wheel-tire combina-
tion from your BMW center.
The right wheel-and-tire combination is
another vital factor in ensuring reliable opera-
tion of various vehicle systems such as ABS
and DSC.
To maintain good handling and vehicle
response, use only tires of a single tread config-
uration from a single manufacturer. After a tire is
damaged, always remember to have the original
wheel and tire combination remounted on the
vehicle as soon as possible.
Wheels with electronics for
TPM Tire Pressure Monitor
When mounting new tires or converting from
summer to winter tires or vice versa, only use
wheels with TPM electronics, otherwise the
Tire Pressure Monitor cannot detect a flat tire,
refer to page 91. Your BMW center will be
happy to advise you on this subject.
Recommended tire brands
BMW recommends particular tire brands for
each tire size. You can recognize these from the
clearly visible BMW marking on the tire sidewall.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Mobility
205
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
With proper use, these tires meet the highest
standards for safety and handling characteris-
tics.
Run-flat tires
When installing new tires or when changing
from summer tires to winter tires, for your own
safety, use run-flat tires. No spare wheel is pro-
vided in the event of a flat. Your BMW center will
be glad to advise you.
For safety reasons, BMW recommends
that you do not have damaged run-flat
tires repaired; they should be replaced.<
Special characteristics of winter tires
BMW recommends winter tires for use in cold
winter driving conditions. Although all-season
M+S tires provide better winter traction than
summer tires, they generally fail to provide the
same levels of cold-weather performance as
winter tires.
Watch speed
Always observe the maximum permissi-
ble speed for the winter tires, otherwise
tire damage may occur, which can result in acci-
dents.<
Storage
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible. Always
protect tires against all contact with oil, grease
and fuels. Do not exceed the maximum tire
inflation pressure indicated on the side wall of
the tire.
Rotating wheels between axles
BMW does not recommend moving the front
wheels to the rear or vice versa, as otherwise
the handling characteristics may be impaired.
Snow chains*
BMW only tests certain fine-link snow chains,
classifies them as road-safe and recommends
them. Consult your BMW center for more infor-
mation.
These snow chains are approved exclusively for
use in pairs on the rear wheels with the tire size:
> 245/50 R 17 Y
> 245/45 R 18 Y
Observe the manufacturer's instructions when
mounting snow chains. Do not exceed a speed
of 30 mph/50 km/h with the chains mounted.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after
installing snow chains as this could cause
the Flat Tire Monitor to malfunction.
When driving with snow chains, it may be prac-
tical to briefly activate DTC, refer to page 88.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Under the hood
206
Under the hood
Never attempt to perform any service or
repair operations on your vehicle without
the required professional technical training. If
you are unfamiliar with the specifications to be
observed, only have work carried out on your
vehicle by a BMW center or a repair shop that
works in accordance with BMW guidelines and
uses appropriately trained personnel. Other-
wise, there is a danger of damage and associ-
ated safety risks if this work is performed
improperly.<
Hood
Releasing
Pull lever.
Opening
Press the release handle and open the hood.
Closing
Close the hood from a height of approx. 16 in/
40 cm with momentum. It must be clearly heard
to engage.
Make sure that the closing path of the
hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may
result.
If you see any signs that the hood is not com-
pletely closed while you are driving your vehicle,
you should stop at once and close it securely.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Mobility
207
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Engine compartment
1 Filler neck for engine oil, refer to Adding
engine oil
2 Jump-starting terminal, refer to page 218
3 Filler neck for washer fluid of the headlamp
and windshield cleaning systems, refer to
page 67
4 Expansion tank for coolant, refer to
page 209
Engine oil
Engine oil consumption depends on driving
style and driving conditions.
Checking engine oil level
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic oil
level check.
The condition for the most accurate indication
of the oil level possible is measurement with the
engine at operating temperature, i.e. following
an uninterrupted drive of at least 6 miles/10 km.
You can display the oil level on the Control Dis-
play while driving or when stopped on a level
surface with the engine running.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Info sources" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "Service" is
selected and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Under the hood
208
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Service requirements" is
selected and press the controller.
6. Change to the second field from the top if
necessary. Turn the controller until "Engine
oil level" is selected and press the control-
ler. The oil level is displayed.
Possible messages
> "Engine oil level O.K."
> "No measurement available: Updating
engine oil level measurement...":
Engine oil level is being measured. This
process can take approx. 3 minutes when
stopped on a level surface and approx.
5 minutes while driving.
> "Oil level at the minimum! Refill with 1 quart
of engine oil.":
Add 1 US quart/liter of engine oil at the next
opportunity.
> "Engine oil level too high":
Have the vehicle checked immedi-
ately; otherwise, engine damage may
result if too much oil has been added.<
> "Please observe recalculated service inter-
val for engine oil":
Do not add engine oil. Continued driving is
possible. To do this, observe the recalcu-
lated remaining mileage until the next oil
change service, refer to page 210. Have the
system checked as soon as possible.
Adding engine oil
Do not add 1 US quart/1 liter of oil until a corre-
sponding message is shown on the Control Dis-
play.
Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km,
otherwise the engine could be dam-
aged.<
Continuous exposure to used oil has
caused cancer in laboratory testing.
For this reason, thoroughly wash exposed areas
of skin with soap and water after such work.
Keep oil, grease, etc. out of reach of children
and observe warnings on containers. Failure to
do so could pose health risks.<
Oil change
Have oil changes carried out only by a BMW
center or a repair shop that works in accordance
with BMW guidelines and uses appropriately
trained personnel.
Approved engine oils
The quality of the engine oil selected has critical
significance for the operation and service life of
an engine. BMW continuously approves spe-
cific oils after confirming their suitability for use
in its vehicles with extensive testing.
Use only approved BMW High Performance
Synthetic Oil.
If BMW High Performance Synthetic Oil is
unavailable, you can add small quantities of
other synthetic oils between oil changes. Use
only oils of the specification API SH or higher.
Your BMW center will be happy to answer
detailed questions on BMW High Perfor-
mance Synthetic Oil or approved synthetic
oils.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Mobility
209
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
You can also call BMW of North America at
1-800-831-1117 or visit the website at
www.bmwusa.com to obtain this information.
Do not use oil additives; under some cir-
cumstances, they can damage your
engine.<
Viscosity grades
The viscosity is a measure of the thickness of
the oil and is specified in SAE grades.
The choice of the right SAE grade is based on
the climatic conditions in the region in which
you normally drive your BMW.
Approved oils belong to the SAE grades
5W-40 and 5W-30.<
These oils can be used for driving at all outside
temperatures.
Coolant
Do not open the cooling system when the
engine is hot. Escaping coolant can cause
burns.<
Coolant consists of water and coolant additive.
Not all commercially available additives are suit-
able for your BMW. Ask your BMW center for
suitable additives.
Only use suitable additives, otherwise
engine damage may result. The additives
present a health hazard.<
Always observe all applicable environ-
mental laws and regulations when dis-
posing of used coolant additives.<
Checking coolant level
1. Allow the engine to cool.
2. Turn the cap of the expansion tank counter-
clockwise to allow any accumulated pres-
sure to escape, then continue turning to
open.
3. The coolant level is correct when it lies
between the MIN and MAX mark, also refer
to the drawing next to the filler neck.
4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to
the specified level – do not overfill.
5. Turn the cap until it clicks.
6. Have the reason for the coolant loss elimi-
nated as soon as possible.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Maintenance
210
Maintenance
BMW Maintenance System
The BMW Maintenance System supports the
preservation of the traffic and operating safety
of your BMW. The service schedule also
includes operations related to the vehicle's
comfort and convenience features, such as
replacement of the filters for the inside air.
The ultimate objective is to ensure economical
maintenance by providing the ideal service for
your vehicle.
Should the day come when you decide to sell
your BMW, you will find that a complete dealer
service history is an asset of inestimable value.
CBS Condition Based Service
Sensors and special algorithms take the differ-
ent driving conditions of your BMW into
account. Condition Based Service uses this to
determine the current and future service
requirements. By letting you define a service
and maintenance regimen that reflects your
own individual requirements, the system builds
the basis for trouble-free driving.
You can set the Control Display to show
remaining distances and times of selected
maintenance intervals and legally mandated
deadlines, refer to page 78:
> Engine oil
> Brake pads, front and rear separately
> Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
> Brake fluid
> Spark plugs
> Vehicle check
> Legally required tests depending on local
regulations
Service data in remote control
Your vehicle stores the information required for
maintenance continuously in the remote con-
trol during driving. After accessing the data
stored in the remote control, your BMW Service
Advisor can suggest precisely the right array of
service procedures for your own individual vehi-
cle. For this reason, when you take your vehicle
in for service, you should give the BMW Service
Advisor the remote control last used to drive it.
Make sure the date is set correctly, refer
to page 84, otherwise the effectiveness
of CBS Condition Based Service is not
ensured.<
Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models and
Warranty and Service Guide Booklet
for Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet for US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models
for additional information on service require-
ments.
BMW recommends that you have service
and repair operations performed at your
BMW center.
Take the time to ensure that these service pro-
cedures are confirmed by entries in your vehi-
cle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models and Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian models. These entries
verify that your vehicle has received the speci-
fied regular maintenance.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Mobility
211
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Socket for OBD Onboard
Diagnostics interface
Components which are decisive for the
exhaust-gas composition can be checked via
the OBD socket with a device.
This socket is located under a cover on the left
side of the driver's footwell, directly under the
instrument panel.
Exhaust-gas values
The warning lamp lights up. The
exhaust-gas values are deteriorating.
Have the vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
Display of the previously described
malfunction on Canadian models.
The lamp flashes under certain conditions. This
is a sign of excessive misfiring of the engine. In
this case, you should reduce speed and drive to
the nearest BMW center as soon as possible.
Heavy engine misfiring causes serious damage
to the emission-relevant components, espe-
cially the catalytic converter, within a short time.
If the fuel filler cap is not properly tight-
ened, the OBD system can detect the
escape of fuel vapor. This causes a display to
light up. If the cap is then tightened, the display
should go out within a few days.<
Event data recorders
Your vehicle may be equipped with one or sev-
eral measuring and diagnosis modules, or with a
device for recording or transmitting certain
vehicle data or information. If you have also sub-
scribed to a BMW Assist plan, then certain vehi-
cle data can be transmitted or recorded to
enable corresponding services.
Care
Important information on care and maintenance
of your BMW is contained in the Caring for your
vehicle brochure.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Replacing components
212
Replacing components
Onboard tool kit
The onboard tool kit is located in the luggage
compartment under the floor mat.
Replacing wiper blades
1. Fold the wiper arm out and grasp it firmly.
2. Press the locking tabs together while slid-
ing the wiper blade toward the front to dis-
engage it.
3. Insert the new wiper blade and slide it in
until it audibly clicks into place.
Lamps and bulbs
Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribu-
tion to driving safety. You must be duly diligent
in replacing them. If you are not familiar with the
specified procedures, have the corresponding
work carried out at your BMW center.
Never touch the glass on new bulbs with
your bare fingers, as even minute
amounts of contamination will burn into the
bulb's surface and reduce its service life. Use a
clean cloth, napkin, etc., or hold the bulb by its
metal socket.<
A selection of replacement bulbs is available at
your BMW center.
Whenever you perform any work on the
electrical system, turn off the electrical
devices involved to prevent short circuits from
occurring. To avoid possible injury or equip-
ment damage when replacing bulbs, follow any
instructions provided by the bulb manufac-
turer.<
When performing maintenance on the head-
lamps, follow the instructions in the separate
Caring for your vehicle brochure.
For bulbs for which changing is not
described, and for checking and adjusting
headlamp aim, please contact your BMW cen-
ter.<
Light-emitting diodes LEDs
Light-emitting diodes installed behind translu-
cent lenses serve as the light source for many of
the controls and displays in your vehicle. These
light-emitting diodes, which operate using a
concept similar to that applied in conventional
lasers, are officially designated as Class 1 light-
emitting diodes.
Do not remove the covers, and never
stare into the unfiltered light for several
hours, as irritation of the retina could result.<
Xenon lamps
The service life of these lamps is very long and
the probability of a failure is very low, provided
that they are not switched on and off an unusual
number of times. If one of these bulbs should
nevertheless fail, it is possible to continue driv-
ing with great caution using the fog lamps, pro-
vided traffic laws in your area do not prohibit
this.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Mobility
213
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Have work on the xenon lighting system
performed only by your BMW center or a
workshop that works according to BMW repair
procedures with correspondingly trained per-
sonnel. Due to the high voltage involved, there
is a danger to life and limb when work is carried
out improperly.<
High beams, parking lamps
The illustration shows the front left side of the
engine compartment.
High beams
55-watt bulb, H 7
1. Remove the cover cap 1 by pressing the tab
and removing the cover cap upward.
2. Press the bulb holder from above to release
it.
3. Remove the bulb holder.
4. Remove and replace the bulb.
The lamp H7 is pressurized; wear eye
protection and protective gloves. Other-
wise, there is a danger of injuries if the bulb is
accidentally damaged during replacement.<
Parking lamps
10-watt bulb
Bulb holder and reflector are one unit and
are replaced together.<
1. Turn the bulb holder 2 to the right and
remove.
2. Press the snap connection on the plug con-
nector, pull off the bulb holder and replace.
Front turn signals, side marker lamps
Your BMW is equipped with two turn signal
lamps per side in the front.
Turn signal lamp 1
21-watt bulb, WY21SV
The illustration shows the front right side of the
engine compartment.
1. Press the lever shown:
> downward for the right turn signal
> upward for the left turn signal
2. Remove the bulb holder towards the rear.
3. Remove and replace the bulb.
Turn signal lamp 2
21-watt bulb, WY21SV
The bulb for the turn signal lamp 2 can be
replaced via the wheel well.
The illustration shows the front left side of the
vehicle.
1. Turn the steering all the way to be able to
remove the cover, refer to illustration.
2. Turn off the light, switch off the ignition and
remove the remote control from the ignition
lock.
3. Unscrew the two bolts with an open-ended
wrench.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Replacing components
214
4. Turn the bulb holder to the left and remove,
refer to arrow.
5. Remove and replace the bulb.
Side marker lamps
5-watt bulb, WY5WST
The bulb can be replaced via a cover at the front
of the wheel well, refer to the description for
turn signal lamp 2.
1. The bulb holder of the side marker lamp is
located toward the outside of the vehicle
next to the bulb holder of turn signal lamp 2.
2. Turn the bulb holder to the left and remove.
3. Remove and replace the bulb.
Side turn signals
5-watt bulb, WY5W
1. Press against the front edge of the lamp
with the tip of your finger, then push it to the
rear, release the snap connection at the
front and take it off the trim strip.
2. Turn the bulb holder to the left by 905 and
remove.
3. Remove and replace the bulb.
Tail lamps
The roadside parking, rear and brake
lamps are LEDs. The backup lamps are
equipped with long-life bulbs. Please contact a
BMW center in case of a malfunction.<
1 Turn signals
2 Roadside parking, tail and brake lamp
3 Backup lamp
4 Reflector
Rear turn signals
21-watt bulb, PY21W
The illustrations shows the left section of the
luggage compartment.
1. Remove the cover.
2. Unclip the bulb holder and remove.
3. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while
turning it to the left for removal and replace-
ment.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Mobility
215
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
License plate lamps
5-watt bulb, W5W
1. Push a screwdriver from the left under the
lamp and pry out the lamp toward the right.
2. Turn the bulb holder to the left by 905 and
remove.
3. Remove and replace the bulb.
Changing wheels
Your BMW is equipped with run-flat tires as a
standard feature. An immediate wheel change
in the event of a flat tire is therefore no longer
required.
To continue driving with a damaged tire:
> With Flat Tire Monitor, refer to Indication of
a flat tire, page 90
> With Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to Mes-
sage with low tire inflation pressure,
page 92
You will recognize run-flat tires by a circular
symbol containing the letters RSC on the side
of the tire, refer to Run-flat tires on page 204.
If you have new tires mounted or switch from
summer to winter tires, or vice versa, use run-
flat tires because no spare tire is provided in
case of a flat. Your BMW center will be glad to
advise you.
Also refer to New wheels and tires, page 204.
The suitable tools for changing tires are
available as accessories from your BMW
center.<
Car jacking points
The jacking points for the car jack are located in
the positions shown.
Vehicle battery
Maintenance
The battery is 100% maintenance-free, i.e., the
electrolyte will last for the life of the battery
when the vehicle is operated in a temperate cli-
mate.
Your BMW center will be glad to advise in all
matters concerning the battery.
Charging battery
Only charge the battery in the vehicle via the
terminals in the engine compartment with the
engine switched off. For the connections, refer
to Jump starting on page 218.
Disposal
After replacement, have old batteries dis-
posed of by your BMW center or deposit
them at a recycling center. Maintain the battery
in an upright position for transport and storage.
Always secure the battery to prevent it from tip-
ping over during transport.<
Power failure
Following a temporary interruption of the power
supply, the operation of some equipment is lim-
ited and must be reinitialized. Individual settings
are also lost and must be updated:
> Seat, mirror and steering wheel memory
The position must be stored again, refer to
page 50.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Replacing components
216
> Time and Date
The values must be updated, refer to
page 83.
> Radio
Stations must be stored again if necessary,
refer to page 158.
> Navigation system
Wait until the system starts, refer to
page 126.
Fuses
Never attempt to repair a blown fuse, and
do not replace a defective fuse with a sub-
stitute of another color or amperage rating, as
this could lead to overloading of the wiring, ulti-
mately resulting in a fire in the vehicle.<
Spare fuses and a pair of plastic tweezers are
located in the compartment for the onboard tool
kit, refer to page 212.
Information on fuse allocation is located below
the bracket for the onboard tool kit, see below.
In glove compartment
1. Press the button on the back in the center of
partition 1 and pull out the partition upward,
arrow 2.
2. Press the coupling downward, arrow 3, and
fold the lid 4 forward.
In luggage compartment
Fold the cover under the floor mat upward and
remove the bracket for the onboard tool kit.
Information on fuse allocation 1 and additional
fuses 2 are provided there.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Mobility
217
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Giving and receiving assistance
Emergency call
Conditions for an emergency call:
> Full preparation package mobile phone.
With this equipment, an emergency call is
still possible when no mobile phone is
paired in the vehicle.
> BMW Assist is activated. Activating
BMW Assist, refer to page 194.
> Radio readiness is activated.
> The BMW Assist system is logged on to a
mobile phone network.
> The emergency call system is operable.
Once your service contract for BMW Assist
expires, the BMW Assist system can be deacti-
vated by a BMW center without you having to
visit a workshop. Following deactivation of the
BMW Assist system, no emergency calls can be
made. The BMW Assist system can be reacti-
vated after concluding a new agreement at a
BMW center.
Initiating an emergency call
1. Briefly press protective cover to open.
With some vehicle equipment packages or
in the Convertible, the arrangement of the
switches and indicator lamps may differ
somewhat.
2. Press the button for at least 2 seconds.
The LED in the button lights up. As soon as the
voice connection to the BMW Assist Response
Center has been established, the LED flashes.
When the emergency call is received at the
BMW Assist Response Center, the BMW Assist
Response Center contacts you and arranges
for additional steps to help you.
If conditions allow, remain in the vehicle until
the connection has been established. You will
then be able to provide a detailed description of
the situation.
If the current position of your vehicle can be
determined, it will be transmitted to the BMW
Assist Response Center.
If the LED is flashing but the BMW Assist
Response Center cannot be heard over the
hands-free system, it is possible that the
hands-free system is malfunctioning. You may
still be heard by the BMW Assist Response
Center, however.
Under certain conditions, an emergency call is
automatically initiated immediately after a
severe accident. The automatic emergency call
is not affected by the button being pressed.
For technical reasons, the emergency call
cannot be guaranteed under the most
unfavorable conditions.<
You can also use other services of
BMW Assist with this button, refer to
page 189.<
Warning triangle*
The warning triangle is located on the left-hand
side in the luggage compartment.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Giving and receiving assistance
218
First-aid kit*
The first-aid kit is located in the filler element of
the rear seat backrest.
1. Press the button downward and pull the
filler element forward.
2. Take out first-aid kit.
To refit the filler element, insert the two
bottom tabs into the strip and press the
filler element back into place. Make sure that
you do not damage the rear seat upholstery.<
Some of the articles contained in the first-aid kit
have a limited service life. For this reason, check
the expiration dates of each of the items regu-
larly and replace any whose expiration dates
have passed.
Roadside Assistance*
The Roadside Assistance of the BMW Group
offers you assistance in the event of a break-
down around the clock, including on weekends
and public holidays.
The phone numbers of the Roadside Assis-
tance in your home country can be found in the
BMW Contact directory.
With BMW Assist you can contact the Roadside
Assistance of the BMW Group for assistance in
the event of a breakdown directly via iDrive,
refer to page 190.
Jump starting
When your battery is discharged, you can use
two jumper cables to start your BMW with
power from the battery in a second vehicle. You
can also use the same method to help start
another vehicle. Use only jumper cables with
fully-insulated clamp handles.
To avoid the risk of potentially fatal injury,
always avoid all contact with electrical
components while the engine is running. Care-
fully adhere to the following sequence, both to
prevent damage to one or both vehicles, and to
guard against possible personal injuries.<
Preparing
1. Check whether the battery of the other
vehicle has a voltage of 12 Volts and
approximately the same capacitance in Ah.
This information can be found on the bat-
tery.
2. Switch off the engine of the vehicle provid-
ing assistance.
3. Switch off any electrical systems and com-
ponents in both vehicles.
There must not be any contact between
the bodies of the two vehicles; otherwise,
there is a danger of short circuiting.<
Connecting jumper cables
To avoid personal injury from sparks, fol-
low this sequence when connecting
jumper cables.<
In your BMW, the so-called jump-starting termi-
nal for jump starting in the engine compartment
serves as a positive terminal for the battery, also
refer to engine compartment overview on
page 207. The cover cap is marked with a +.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Mobility
219
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
1. Fold open the cover of the BMW jump-
starting terminal. To do so, pull the tab.
2. Attach one end of the jumper cable plus/+
to the positive terminal of the battery or a
jump-starting terminal of the vehicle provid-
ing assistance.
3. Attach the second end of the cable to the
positive terminal of the battery or to a jump-
starting terminal of the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one end of the jumper cable minus/–
to the negative terminal of the battery or to
an engine or body ground of the vehicle
providing assistance.
Your BMW has a special nut as body ground
or negative terminal.
5. Attach the second end of the cable to the
negative terminal of the battery or to the
engine or body ground of the vehicle to be
started.
Starting engine
1. Start the engine on the assisting vehicle
and allow it to run at idle for several minutes
at slightly increased speed.
2. Start the engine on the other vehicle in the
usual way.
If the first starting attempt is not successful,
wait a few minutes before another attempt
in order to allow the discharged battery to
recharge.
3. Let the engines run for a few minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables by reversing
the connection sequence.
Check the battery and recharge if necessary.
Never use spray fluids to start the
engine.<
Tow-starting and towing
Observe applicable laws and regulations
for tow-starting and towing.<
Do not transport any passengers other
than the driver in a vehicle that is being
towed.<
Using tow fitting
The threaded tow fitting is stored in the tool kit
mounted on the inside of the luggage compart-
ment under the floor mat, refer to page 212, and
should always remain in the vehicle. It can be
screwed in at the front or rear of the BMW.
Only use the tow fitting that comes with
the vehicle and screw it in as far as possi-
ble. Use the tow fitting for towing only on roads.
Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g. do
not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting. Otherwise,
the tow fitting and vehicle can be damaged.<
Access to screw thread
Press the arrow symbol on the cover in the
bumper.
Front
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Giving and receiving assistance
220
Rear
Being towed
Make sure that the ignition is switched on,
refer to page 59; otherwise, the low-beam
headlamps, tail lights, turn signals and wind-
shield wipers would not be available. Do not tow
the vehicle with the rear axle raised, as other-
wise the steering can turn to the left or right.
When the engine is stopped, there is no power
assist. This then requires increased effort for
braking and steering. Active steering is deacti-
vated and larger steering wheel movements are
required.<
Switch on the hazard warning flashers depend-
ing on the local regulations. If the electrical sys-
tem fails, mark the vehicle to be towed, e.g. with
a sign or warning triangle in the rear window.
Manual transmission
Gearshift lever in neutral position.
Automatic transmission
Selector lever in position N.
Changing selector lever position, refer to Deac-
tivating selector lever interlock page 64.
Do not exceed a towing speed of
45 mph/70 km/h and a towing distance of
90 miles/150 km; otherwise, the automatic
transmission may be damaged.<
SMG Sequential Manual Transmission
Engage selector lever position N with the igni-
tion switched on.
Towing methods
Do not lift vehicle by tow fitting or body
and chassis parts; otherwise, damage
may result.<
In some countries, towing with tow bars or
ropes in public traffic is not permitted. Familiar-
ize yourself with the regulations on towing in the
respective country.
With tow bar
The towing vehicle may not be lighter
than the vehicle to be towed; otherwise, it
will not be possible to reliably control vehicle
response.<
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles. Should it prove impossi-
ble to avoid mounting the tow bar at an offset
angle, please note the following:
> Clearance and maneuvering capability will
be strictly limited during cornering.
> When mounted at an angle, the tow bar will
exert lateral forces, tending to push the
vehicle sideways.
Attach the tow bar to the tow fittings only,
as attachment to other vehicle parts can
lead to damage.<
With tow rope
When starting off in the towing vehicle, make
sure that the tow rope is taut.
To avoid jerking and the associated
stresses on vehicle components when
towing, always use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
Attach tow ropes to the tow fittings only, as
attachment to other vehicle parts can lead to
damage.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Mobility
221
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
With tow truck
Have the BMW transported with a tow truck
with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.
Tow-starting
Do not tow-start the vehicle if possible, but
instead start the engine by means of jump start-
ing, refer to page 218. With a catalytic con-
verter, tow-starting should only be carried out
with the engine cold, and with automatic trans-
missions, the engine cannot be started by tow-
starting.
1. Switch on the hazard warning flashers,
comply with country-specific regulations.
2. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 59.
3. Shift into 3rd gear. For information on SMG,
see below.
4. Tow-start with the clutch completely
depressed and slowly release the clutch.
After the engine starts, immediately
depress the clutch again completely.
5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow
bar or rope and switch off the hazard warn-
ing flashers.
6. Have the vehicle checked.
SMG Sequential Manual Transmission
1. Tow-start in selector lever position N.
2. Select the sequential mode. The correct
gear will be selected and engaged automat-
ically.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Reference
This chapter contains the technical data,
the short commands of the voice command
system, and the index that will direct you
as quickly as possible to the information
you are looking for.
Reference
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Technical data
224
Technical data
Dimensions
Coupe
All dimensions given in inches/mm. Smallest turning circle diam.: 37.4 ft/11.4 m
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Technical data
226
Weights
Never exceed either the approved axle loads or
the gross vehicle weight.
Capacities
650i Coupe 650i Convertible
Curb weight lbs./kg 3,814/1,730 4,277/1,940
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs./kg 4,652/2,110 5,049/2,290
Load lbs./kg 838/380 772/350
Approved front axle load lbs./kg 2,337/1,060 2,403/1,090
Approved rear axle load lbs./kg 2,491/1,130 2,778/1,260
Luggage compartment capacity cu ft/l 15.9/450 10.6/300
> with raised convertible top com-
partment floor, refer to page 35
cu ft/l – 12.4/350
Notes
Fuel tank US gal/liters approx. 18.5/70 Fuel specification: page 199
including reserve of: US gal/liters approx. 2.6/10
Window and headlamp
wiper system US quarts/liters approx. 5.3/5
For details: page 67
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Reference
227
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Short commands of voice command
system
With short commands you can run certain func-
tions directly, regardless of which menu item is
selected. Here are the important short com-
mands for the voice command system.
Assistance window
Communication
*
Function Command
To open the assistance window 20 {Assistance window}
To select the display in the assistance window 20 {Assistance window map facing north},
{Assistance window map direction of travel},
{Assistance window arrow display},
{Assistance window perspective},
{Assistance window current position},
{Assistance window trip computer} or
{Assistance window onboard info}
To change scale in assistance window 126 {Assistance window scale ... feet} or
{Assistance window scale ... miles}
Function Command
To activate telephone 181 {Phone}
To dial phone number 181 {Dial number}
To display the phone book 182 {A to Z}
To dial from phone book 182 {Call ...} or
{Dial name}
To display "Top 8" 183 {Top 8}
To redial 183 {Redial}
To display "Received calls" 183 {Received calls}
To display "Missed calls" 183 {Missed calls}
To display "Bluetooth" 175 {Bluetooth}
To open BMW Assist 189 {BMW Assist}
To open BMW Service, Services 189 {BMW Service}
To open "BMW Contact" 183 {BMW Contact}
To open "BMW Contact Numbers" 191 {BMW Contact numbers}
To open "Roadside Assistance" 190 {Roadside Assistance}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Short commands of voice command system
228
Navigation
Onboard info
Function Command
To open navigation 126 {Navigation}
To open "Enter address" {Enter address}
To open "New destination" {New destination}
To display "Input map" {Input map}
To display destination list {Destination list}
To display the address book {Address book}
To display the route criteria {Route preference}
To start destination guidance {Start guidance}
To end destination guidance {Stop guidance}
To display arrow display {Arrow display}
To display map view {Map}, {Map facing north},
{Map direction of travel} or
{Perspective}
To change scale {Scale ... miles} or
{Scale ... feet}
To display streets and towns/cities of the route {Route list}
To switch on voice instructions {Navigation info on}
To switch off voice instructions {Navigation info off}
To repeat voice instructions {Repeat navigation info}
To open route {Route menu}
To display current position {Current position}
Function Command
To open "Car Data" 77 {Car data}
To display the computer 77 {Onboard info}
To display the trip computer 77 {Trip computer}
To start the stopwatch 83 {Stopwatch}
To set the speed limit 82 {Limit}
To activate speed limit 82 {Limit on}
To deactivate speed limit 82 {Limit off}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Reference
229
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Entertainment
Function Command
Tone control 153 {Audio}
To switch on radio 156 {Radio on},
{FM} or
{AM}
To open "FM" 156 {FM menu}
To open "AM" 156 {AM menu}
To open "All stations" 156 {FM All stations}
To select the radio station 156 {Station ...}, e.g. {Station WNYC}, or
{Choose station}
To open "Presets" 156 {FM presets} or
{AM presets}
To select preset radio station 156 {Preset ...}, e.g. {Preset 1}
To open "Manual" 157 {FM manual},
{AM manual} or
{Choose frequency},
{Frequency ... Megahertz}
To open the radio station with the best
reception 157
{AM Autostore}
To open "WB" 160 {Weatherband menu}
To switch on weatherband 160 {Weatherband on}
To select a weatherband station 160 {Choose weatherband station
}
To open "SAT" 163 {SAT radio menu}
To switch on satellite radio 163 {SAT radio}
To open "Presets" of satellite radio 164 {SAT radio presets}
To open "All channels" of satellite radio 163 {SAT radio all channels}
To open "Categories" of satellite radio 163 {SAT radio categories}
To select CD player 165 {CD menu}
To switch on CD player 165 {CD}
To select CD changer 165 {CD changer menu}
To switch on CD changer 165 {CD changer}
To select a CD in the CD changer 165 {CD 1...6}
To select music track 166 {CD track ...}
To select a CD and music track in the CD
changer 166
{CD 1...6 track ...}
To switch on audio playback with external audio
device 171
{Audio Aux}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Short commands of voice command system
230
Climate
menu
Function Command
To open "Vent settings" 108 {Vent settings}
To open "Automatic programs" 107 {Automatic programs}
To open "Parked car ventilation" 110 {Parked car operation}
To open "Automatic ventilation" 110 {Automatic ventilation}
To display the activation times 110 {Activation time}
Function Command
To open the menu {Settings menu}
"Display off" 21 {Display off}
To open "Info sources" {Info sources}
To open "Settings" {Settings}
To open "Door locks" 30, 32 {Door locks}
To open "Steering wheel buttons" 55 {Steering wheel buttons}
To open "Lighting" 65, 102 {Lighting}
To open "Service requirements" 78, 191 {Service requirements}
To open "Service" 78, 191 {Service}
To open "BMW Service settings" settings 193 {BMW service settings}
To display "Check Control messages" 80 {Check Control messages}
To open "Head-Up Display" 98 {Head-up display}
To adjust the brightness of the Control
Display 84
{Brightness}
To open "Units" 85 {Units}
To open "Languages" 85, 126 {Language}
To open "Time" 83 {Time}
To open "Date" 84 {Date}
To open "PDC" 87 {PDC}
To open "FTM" 90 {
FTM}
To open "TPM" 92 {TPM}
To display "Bluetooth" 175 {Bluetooth}
To activate BMW Night Vision 100 {Night Vision on}
To deactivate BMW Night Vision 100 {Night Vision off}
To display settings for BMW Night Vision 100 {Night Vision settings}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
232
Everything from A to Z
Index
"..." Identifies Control Display
texts used to select
individual functions, and
indicates where to find them
in the text.
A
ABS Antilock Brake
System 87
– indicator/warning lamp 89
ACC, refer to Active cruise
control 68
Acceleration assistant with
SMG 65
Accepted calls 182
Accessories 6
Accident, refer to Emergency
call 217
Activated-charcoal filter for
automatic climate
control 110
Activating hour signal 84
"Activation time" for parked-
car ventilation 110
Active cruise control 68
– indicator lamp 71
– radar sensor 72
– selecting distance 70
– warning lamps 71
Active steering 94
– warning lamp 94
Adapter for spare key 28
Adaptive brake lamps, refer to
Brake force display 94
Adaptive Head Light 103
"Add digits" for mobile
phone 182
Additives
– coolant 209
– engine oil, refer to Approved
engine oils 208
"Address book" for navigation
system 136
Address for navigation
– deleting 137
– entering 128, 131
– selecting 136
– storing 136
– storing current position 136
"Add to address book" 135
"Add to destination
list" 131, 133
Adjusting interior
temperature 107
Adjusting thigh support 49
Adjusting tone in audio mode,
refer to Tone control 153
"After door opened" 51
"After unlocking" 51
Airbags 94
– deactivating, refer to
Exception for front
passenger seat 57
– indicator/warning lamp 96
– indicator lamp for front
passenger airbags 95
– sitting safely 48
Air distribution
– automatic 107
– manual 108
Airing, refer to Ventilation 109
Air outlets, refer to
Ventilation 109
Air recirculation, refer to AUC
Automatic recirculated-air
control 109
"Air recirculation on / off" 56
Air supply, automatic climate
control 106
Air volume 108
AKI, refer to Fuel
specifications 199
Alarm system 35
– avoiding unintentional
alarms 36
– interior motion sensor 36
– switching off alarm 36
– switching off tilt alarm
sensor and interior motion
sensor 36
– tilt alarm sensor 36
"All channels" 163
"All doors" 30
All-season tires, refer to
Winter tires 205
"All stations", calling up with
radio 156, 159
Alterations, technical, refer to
For your own safety 6
"AM", reception
range 152, 156
Antenna, refer to Caring for
your vehicle brochure
Antenna for mobile phone 174
Antifreeze
– coolant 209
– washer fluid 67
Antilock Brake System
ABS 87
– indicator/warning lamp 89
Anti-theft alarm system, refer
to Alarm system 35
Anti-theft system, refer to
Central locking system 30
Approved axle loads, refer to
Weights 226
Approved engine oils 208
Approved gross vehicle
weight, refer to Weights 226
Armrest, refer to Center
armrest 114
Around the center console 14
Around the steering wheel 10
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Reference
233
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Arrival time
– refer to Computer 77
– refer to Starting destination
guidance 140
"Arrow display" for navigation
system 141
Artificial leather, refer to
Caring for your vehicle
brochure
Ashtray 115
Assist, refer to
BMW Assist 189
Assistance systems, refer to
Driving stability control
systems 87
Assistance window 20
"Assist. window off" 21
AUC Automatic recirculated-
air control 109
"Audio" 153, 155, 160
Audio 152
– controls 152
– switching on/off 152
– tone control 153
– volume 153
Audio device, external 114
Automatic
– air distribution 107
– air volume 107
– cruise control 67, 68
– headlamp control 102
– recirculated-air control
AUC 109
– service notification 191
– steering wheel
adjustment 50
– storing stations 157
Automatic car washes 122
– also refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
– also refer to Comfort
access 38
Automatic climate control 106
– automatic air
distribution 107
– convertible program 107
– switching on and off 109
– ventilation with vehicle
parked 110
Automatic closing of doors,
refer to Automatic soft
closing 34
Automatic curb monitor 54
Automatic lighting
– refer to Automatic headlamp
control 102
– refer to Daytime running
lamps 103
– refer to Interior lamps 104
– refer to Pathway lighting 102
"Automatic programs" 107
Automatic soft closing 34
Automatic station search 157
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic 63
– deactivating selector lever
interlock 64
– Dynamic Driving Control 64
– interlock 63
– kick-down 64
– selector lever lock,
interlock 63
– shiftlock 63
– towing 220
– tow-starting 221
– with comfort access 38
"Automatic ventilation" 110
AUTO program with
automatic climate
control 107
"Autostore" on the
radio 156, 158
"AUX" 152, 171
AUX-In connection 114, 171
Average fuel consumption 76
– setting units 85
Average speed 76
"Avoid ferries" for navigation
system 139
"Avoid highways" for
navigation system 138
Avoiding freeways for
navigation 138
Avoiding unintentional
alarms 36
"Avoid tollroads" for
navigation system 139
Axle loads, refer to
Weights 226
"A - Z" 182
B
Backrest contour, refer to
Lumbar support 49
Backrests, refer to Seats 49
Backup lamps, replacing
bulbs, refer to Tail
lamps 214
"Balance", refer to Tone
control 154
Band-aids, refer to First-aid
kit 218
Bass, refer to Tone
control 153
"Bass", tone control 153
Battery
– jump starting 218
– refer to Vehicle battery 215
Battery replacement, remote
control for comfort
access 38
BC button, refer to
Computer 76
Being towed 220
Belts, refer to Safety belts 53
Beverage holder, refer to Cup
holders 115
Blower, refer to Air
volume 108
"Bluetooth" 176
"BMW Assist" 190
BMW Assist 189
– activating 194
– breakdown assistance 190
– contacting BMW Customer
Relations 192
– displaying vehicle data 195
– information service 192
– services offered 189
– TeleService 191
– updating 193
"BMW Contact" 184
"BMW Contact
Numbers" 184
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
234
BMW homepage 4
BMW Maintenance
System 210
BMW Night Vision 99
– activating 100
– cleaning camera 101
– cleaning camera, refer to
Wiper system 67
– deactivating 100
– making settings 100
"BMW Service settings" 193
BMW website 4
Bottle holder, refer to Cup
holders 115
Bracket for telephone or
mobile phone, refer to Snap-
in adapter 187
Brake assistant 88
Brake force display 94
Brake lamps
– replacing bulbs, refer to Tail
lamps 214
– two-stage 94
Brake rotors
– breaking-in 120
– refer to Braking safely 121
Brakes
– ABS Antilock Brake
System 87
– brake force display 94
– breaking-in 120
– CBC Cornering Brake
Control 87
– electronic brake-force
distribution 87
– handbrake 61
– refer to Braking safely 121
Brake system 120
– brake pads 120
– brake rotors 122
– breaking-in 120
– warning lamp 13, 89
Braking safely 121
Breakdown assistance 190
Breakdown services, refer to
Roadside Assistance 218
Breaking-in 120
Breaking-in brake pads 120
Breaking-in the clutch 120
Breaking-in the differential,
refer to Engine and
differential 120
"Brightness" 85, 98
– with BMW Night Vision 101
Brightness of Control
Display 84
Button for starting engine,
refer to Start/Stop button 59
Buttons on steering wheel 11
Bypassing route sections 144
C
California Proposition 65
Warning 6
"Call" 182, 193
Call
– accepting 181
– displaying accepted 183
– ending 181
– in absence 183
– rejecting 181
– starting 181
Calling
– by entering phone
number 181
– from phone book 182
– from Top 8 list 183
– redialing 183
Can holder, refer to Cup
holders 115
Capacities 226
Car battery, refer to Vehicle
battery 215
Car care, refer to Caring for
your vehicle brochure
Car-care products, refer to
Caring for your vehicle
brochure
"Car Data" 77
Care 211
– refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
Cargo loading
– securing cargo 123
– stowing cargo 123
– vehicle 122
Caring for artificial leather,
refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
Caring for leather, refer to
Caring for your vehicle
brochure
Caring for light-alloy wheels,
refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
Caring for plastic, refer to
Caring for your vehicle
brochure
Caring for the carpet, refer to
Caring for your vehicle
brochure
Caring for the vehicle finish,
refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
Car key, refer to Keys/remote
control 28
Car phone 175
– installation location, refer to
Center armrest 114
– refer to Mobile phone 174
– refer to separate operating
instructions
Car radio, refer to Radio 156
Car wash 122
– refer to Before driving into a
car wash 122
– refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
– with comfort access 38
Catalytic converter, refer to
Hot exhaust system 120
"Categories" 163
CBC Cornering Brake
Control 87
CBS Condition Based
Service 210
"CD" 152, 165
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Reference
235
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
CD changer 165
– controls 152
– fast forward/reverse 168
– installation location 168
– random sequence 168
– repeating a track 167
– sampling a track 167
– selecting a CD 165
– selecting a track 166
– switching on/off 152
– tone control 153
– volume 153
CD player 165
– controls 152
– fast forward/reverse 168
– random sequence 168
– repeating a track 167
– sampling a track 167
– selecting a track 166
– switching on/off 152
– tone control 153
– volume 153
Center armrest, adjusting
height 114
Center console 14
"Central locking" 30
Central locking
– from inside 32
– from outside 30
Central locking system 30
– comfort access 37
– hotel function 33
Changes, technical, refer to
For your own safety 6
Changing a wheel 215
Changing language on
Control Display 85
Changing scale for navigation
system display 142
Changing units of measure on
Control Display 85
Changing wheels 204
CHECK button 81
Check Control 80
"Check Control
messages" 81
Check Gas Cap 198
Checking air pressure, refer to
Tire inflation pressure 200
Child-restraint fixing system
LATCH 58
Child restraint systems 57
Child seats, refer to
Transporting children
safely 57
Chrome parts, refer to Caring
for your vehicle brochure
Cigarette lighter
116
Cigarette lighter socket, refer
to Connecting electrical
devices 116
Cleaning, refer to Caring for
your vehicle brochure
"Climate" 107
Clock 75
– 12h/24h mode 84
– hour signal 84
– setting time and date 83
Closing
– from inside 32
– from outside 30
Closing fuel filler cap 198
Clothes hooks, Coupe 115
Cockpit 10
Cold start, refer to Starting
engine 60
Comfort access 37
– observe in car wash 38
– replacing battery, remote
control 38
Comfort closing
– windows, with comfort
access with Coupe 37
– with comfort access 37
Comfort operation
– convertible top 31, 32
– glass sunroof 31, 32
– windows 31, 32
"Communication" 180, 190
Compact disc
– refer to CD changer 165
– refer to CD player 165
Compartment for remote
control, refer to Ignition
lock 59
Compartments, refer to
Storage compartments 114
Compressed audio files 165
Computer 76
– displays on Control
Display 77
– hour signal 84
"Concert hall", refer to Tone
control 155
"Concierge" 192
Condensation, refer to When
vehicle is parked 122
Condition Based Service
CBS 210
"Confirmation" 31
Confirmation signals for
locking and unlocking 31
Connecting car vacuum
cleaner, refer to Connecting
electrical devices 116
Consumption display, refer to
Average fuel
consumption
76
Consumption statistics, refer
to Average fuel
consumption 76
"Continue guidance to
destination?" 141
"Contrast" with BMW Night
Vision 101
Control Center, refer to
iDrive 16
Control Display, refer to
iDrive 16
– setting brightness 84
– switching off/on 21
Controller, refer to iDrive 16
Controls, refer to Cockpit 10
Convertible
– convertible program for
automatic climate
control 107
– opening and closing
windows 39
– rollover protection
system 96
– top 42
– wind deflector 46
– window and convertible top
operation with comfort
access 37
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
236
Convertible top
– care, refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
– closing manually 44
– comfort operation 32
– emergency closing 44
– opening and closing 43
Coolant 209
– checking level 209
– temperature 75
Cooling, maximum 109
Cooling function, automatic
climate control 108
Cooling system, refer to
Coolant 209
Copyright 2
Cornering Brake Control
CBC 87
Country of destination for
navigation 129
Courtesy lamps, refer to
Interior lamps 104
Cradle for telephone or mobile
phone 114
Cruise control 67
– active cruise control 68
Cruising range 76
Cup holders 115
Curb weight, refer to
Weights 226
"Current position" 148
Current position
– displaying 148
– entering 136
– storing 136
"Curve mode" with
BMW Night Vision 101
"Customer
Relations" 184, 192
D
Dashboard, refer to
Cockpit 10
Data, technical 224
– capacities 226
– dimensions 224
– measurements 224
– weights 226
"Date" 84
Date 75
– display format 84
– setting 84
"Date format" 84
"Daytime running lamps" 103
Daytime running lamps 103
DBC Dynamic Brake Control,
warning lamp 89
"Deactivated" 51
Deactivating selector lever
interlock 64
Decommissioning the vehicle,
refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
Defect
– tires, refer to Flat Tire
Monitor 89
– tires, refer to Tire Pressure
Monitor 91
Defrosting windows 108
Defrosting windows and
removing condensation 108
Defrosting windshield, refer to
Defrosting windows 108
Defrost position, refer to
Defrosting windows 108
"Delete address book" for
navigation system 137
"Delete all numbers" for
mobile phone 183
"Delete data" for navigation
system 137
"Delete" for mobile
phone 183
Destination address
– deleting 137
– entering 128, 131
Destination for navigation
– destination list 135
– entering via voice 131
– entry 128
– home address 138
– selecting from address
book 136
– selecting using
information 134
– storing 136
Destination guidance 140
– bypassing route
sections 144
– canceling voice
instructions 56
– changing specified
route
138
– displaying route 141
– distance and arrival 140
– interrupting 140
– starting 140
– terminating/continuing 140
– voice instructions 143
– volume of voice
instructions 144
Destination list for
navigation 135
Destinations recently driven
to 135
"Details" in audio mode 167
"Detour" for navigation
system 147
"Dial" for mobile phone 181
"Dial number" 181
"Diamond button" 56
Digital clock 75
Digital radio, refer to High
Definition Radio 160
Dimensions
– Convertible 225
– Coupe 224
Directional indicators, refer to
Turn signals 65
Direction announcements,
refer to Voice
instructions 143
Direction instructions, refer to
Voice instructions 143
Directory, refer to Phone
book 182
Directory for navigation, refer
to Address book 136
"Display" 85
Display, refer to iDrive
controls 16
Display elements, refer to
Instrument cluster 12
Displaying vehicle data 195
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Reference
237
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Display lighting, refer to
Instrument lighting 104
"Display off" 21
Displays
– on Control Display, refer to
iDrive 16
– refer to Instrument
cluster 12
"Display settings" 85, 98
Displays on the windshield,
refer to Head-Up Display 97
Disposal
– battery of remote control
with comfort access 38
– coolant 209
– vehicle battery 215
Distance, refer to
Computer 77
Distance control, refer to
Active cruise control 68
"Distance to dest." 77
Distance to destination, refer
to Computer 77
Distance warning, refer to
PDC Park Distance
Control 86
Door entry lighting, refer to
Interior lamps 104
Door key, refer to Keys/
remote control 28
Door lock 32
"Door locks" 30, 79
Doors
– manual operation 32
– remote control 31
DOT Quality Grades 202
Draft-free ventilation 110
"Driver's door only" 30
Driving lamps, refer to Parking
lamps/low beams 102
Driving route, refer to
Displaying route 141
Driving stability control
systems 87
Driving through water 121
Driving tips, refer to General
driving notes 120
Drying the air, refer to Cooling
function 108
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control 88
– indicator lamp 13, 88
– malfunction 89
DTC Dynamic Traction
Control 88
– activating 88
– indicator lamp 13, 89
DVD for navigation
126
Dynamic Drive 89
Dynamic Driving Control 64
"Dynamic route" for
navigation 139
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 88
Dynamic Traction Control
DTC 88
E
Easy entry, refer to Entering
rear 52
Easy entry/exit 55
Eject button, refer to Buttons
on CD player 152
Electrical malfunction
– convertible top 44
– door lock 32
– driver's door 32
– fuel filler door 198
– glass sunroof 41
– luggage compartment lid 34
– storage compartment, hotel
function 34
Electric convertible top 42
Electric steering wheel
adjustment 55
Electronic brake-force
distribution 87
Electronic oil level check 207
Emergency assistance, refer
to Roadside Assistance 218
Emergency call 217
Emergency operation, refer to
Manual operation
– convertible top 44
– door lock 32
– driver's door 32
– fuel filler door 198
– glass sunroof 41
– hotel function 34
– luggage compartment lid 34
– selector lever interlock,
automatic transmission 64
Emergency release for
luggage compartment lid in
luggage compartment 35
Emergency services, refer to
Roadside Assistance 218
"Enable services" 195
"End call" 182
Engine
– breaking-in 120
– overheated, refer to Coolant
temperature 75
– starting 60
– starting, comfort access 37
– switching off 60
– switching off when equipped
with Automatic
transmission, with comfort
access 38
Engine compartment 207
Engine coolant 209
Engine oil
– adding 208
– additives, refer to Approved
engine oils 208
– approved oils 208
– electronic oil level check 207
– interval between changes,
refer to Service
requirements 78
– oil change 208
– oil grades, refer to Approved
engine oils 208
– recommended oils 208
– temperature 76
– temperature gauge 76
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
238
"Engine oil level" 208
Engine overheating, refer to
Coolant temperature 75
Engine starting, refer to
Starting engine 60
"Enter address" 128, 136
Entering address 128, 131
Entering intersection,
navigation 130
Entering rear 52
Entering town/city for
navigation 129
Entering town/city of
destination name 129
Entering zip code for
navigation 129
"Entertainment" 152
Entertainment sound output
on/off 153
Entry map for destination 133
Equalizer, refer to Tone
control 155
"Equalizer", tone control 155
"ESN" 162
ESP Electronic Stability
Program, refer to DSC
Dynamic Stability
Control 88
Event data recorders 211
Exhaust system, refer to Hot
exhaust system 120
Exterior mirrors 54
– adjusting 54
– automatic dimming
feature 54
– automatic heating 54
– folding in and out 54
– tilting down passenger-side
mirror 54
External audio device 114
Eye for tow-starting and
towing, refer to Tow
fitting 219
Eyes for lashing, refer to
Securing cargo 123
F
"Fader", refer to Tone
control 154
Fader, refer to Tone
control 154
Failure messages, refer to
Check Control 80
False alarm
– refer to Avoiding
unintentional alarms 36
– refer to Switching off
alarm 36
Fastening safety belts, refer to
Safety belts 53
Fastest route for
navigation 138
Fast forward
– CD changer 168
– CD player 168
"Fast route" for
navigation 138
"Favorites", calling up with
radio 159
Filler neck for washer fluid 67
Filter, refer to Microfilter/
activated-charcoal filter 110
Fine wood, refer to Caring for
your vehicle brochure
First aid, refer to First-aid
kit 218
First-aid kit 218
Flashing, when locking and
unlocking, refer to Setting
confirmation signals 31
Flashlight, refer to
Rechargeable flashlight 113
Flat tire
– Flat Tire Monitor 89
– refer to Run-flat tires 204
– run-flat tires 90, 92, 204
– Tire Pressure Monitor 91
– warning lamp 90, 92
Flat Tire Monitor 89
– false alarms 90
– initializing system 90
– limits of system 90
– snow chains 205
– warning lamp 90
Floor mats, refer to Caring for
your vehicle brochure
Floor mats/carpets, refer to
Caring for your vehicle
brochure
Fluid reservoir, refer to Filler
neck for washer fluid 67
"FM", reception
range 152, 156
FM, waveband 156
Fog lamps 104
– indicator lamp 13, 104
Folding into raised position
convertible top
compartment floor,
Convertible 35
Footbrake, refer to Braking
safely 121
Footwell lighting, refer to
Interior lamps 104
For specified oil grades, refer
to Approved engine oils 208
For your own safety 6
Freeway, refer to Route
criteria 138
Front airbags 94
Front passenger airbags
– deactivating 95
– deactivating, refer to
Exception for front
passenger seat 57
"FTM" 90
FTM, refer to Flat Tire
Monitor 89
Fuel
– average consumption 76
– display 76
– fuel specifications 199
– high-quality brands 199
– quality 199
– specifications 199
– tank contents, refer to
Capacities 226
Fuel display, refer to Fuel
gauge 76
Fuel filler door 198
– releasing in the event of
electrical malfunction 198
Fuel gauge 76
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Reference
239
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Full mobile phone preparation
package 174
Full screen display, refer to
Switching assistance
window off 20
"Full screen" with BMW Night
Vision 101
Fuses 216
G
Garage-door opener, refer to
Integrated universal remote
control 112
Gasoline
– refer to Average fuel
consumption 76
– refer to Fuel
specifications 199
– refer to Required fuel 199
Gasoline display, refer to Fuel
gauge 76
Gear changes
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 63
– SMG Sequential Manual
Transmission 63
Gear display
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 63
– SMG Sequential Manual
Transmission 62
Gearshift lever
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 63
– manual transmission 61
– SMG Sequential Manual
Transmission 61
General driving notes 120
Glass sunroof, electric with
raise function 41
– comfort operation 32
– comfort operation with
comfort access 37
– moving manually 41
– remote control 31
Glove compartment 113
– rechargeable flashlight 113
GPS navigation, refer to
Navigation system 126
Grills, refer to Ventilation 109
Gross vehicle weight, refer to
Weights 226
H
Handbrake 61
– indicator lamp 13, 61
Hands-free system, refer to
Microphone 14
Hazard warning flashers 15
"HD radio" 160
HD radio, refer to High
Definition Radio 160
Head airbags 94
Headlamp control,
automatic 102
Headlamp flasher 65
Headlamps
– care, refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
– cleaning, refer to Wiper
system 66
– cleaning tank, refer to
Capacities 226
– filler neck for washer
fluid 207
– replacing bulbs 212
Head Light, refer to Adaptive
Head Light 103
Head restraints
– front 51
– removing 51
– sitting safely 48
"Head-Up Display" 98
Head-Up Display 97
Heated
– mirrors 54
– rear window 108
– seats 53
– steering wheel 55
Heater 107
Heating
– exterior mirrors 54
– interior 106
– rear window 108
– residual heat utilization 109
– seats 53
– steering wheel 55
Heating with engine switched
off, refer to Residual
heat 109
Heavy cargo, refer to Securing
cargo 123
Height, refer to
Dimensions 224
Height adjustment
– seats 49
– steering wheel 55
High beams 104
– headlamp flasher 104
– indicator lamp 13
– replacing bulbs 213
High Definition Radio 160
High water, refer to Driving
through water 121
Hills 121
Holder for cups 115
"Home address" for
navigation system 138
Homepage of BMW 4
Hood 206
Horn 10
Hotel function 33
– unlocking manually 34
Hot exhaust system 120
"Hour memo" 84
"House number" for
destination entry 131
Hydraulic brake assistant,
refer to Brake assistant 88
Hydroplaning 121
– also refer to Minimum tread
depth 203
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
240
I
IBOC, refer to High Definition
Radio 160
Ice, refer to Outside
temperature warning 75
ID3-Tag, refer to Information
about track 166
Identification mark
– recommended tire
brands 204
– run-flat tires 204
– tire coding 202
iDrive 16
– adjusting brightness 84
– assistance window 20
– changing date and time 83
– changing language 85
– changing menu page 19
– changing settings 83
– changing units of measure
and display form 85
– controller 16
– controls 16
– displays, menus 17
– operating principle 17
– selecting menu item 19
– selecting or confirming
entry 19
– start menu 17
– status information 20
– symbols 18
Ignition 59
– switched off 59
– switched on 59
Ignition key, refer to Keys/
remote control 28
Ignition key position 1, refer to
Radio readiness 59
Ignition key position 2, refer to
Ignition on 59
Ignition lock 59
– starting engine with comfort
access 38
i menu 17
Imprint 2
Indicator/warning lamps
– ABS Antilock Brake
System 89
– active steering 94
– airbags 96
– brake system 89
– DSC 13, 88
– DTC 13, 89
– Flat Tire Monitor 90
– fog lamps 13, 104
– handbrake 13, 61
– safety belt warning 53
– TPM Tire Pressure
Monitor 92
Indicator and warning lamps,
overview 13
Inflation pressure, refer to Tire
inflation pressure 200
Inflation pressure monitoring
– refer to Flat Tire Monitor 89
– refer to Tire Pressure
Monitor 91
Info menu 17
Information
– on another location 134
– on current position 134
– on town/city of
destination 134
"Information" for navigation
system 134
Information menu, refer to
imenu17
"Information on
destination" 135
Information service 192
"Info sources" 78
Initializing
– Flat Tire Monitor 90
– radio, refer to Storing
stations 158
– refer to Power failure 215
– seat, mirror and steering
wheel memory 50
– time and date 83
"Input map" 133
Installation location
– CD changer 168
– drive for navigation DVD 126
Instructions for navigation
system, refer to Voice
instructions 143
Instrument cluster 12
Instrument illumination, refer
to Instrument lighting 104
Instrument lighting 104
Instrument panel
– refer to Cockpit 10
– refer to Instrument
cluster 12
Integrated key 28
Integrated universal remote
control 112
Interesting destination for
navigation 134
"Interim time" 83
Interior lamps 104
– switching on with remote
control 31
Interior motion sensor 36
– switching off 36
Interior rearview mirror,
automatic dimming
feature
54
Interlock on automatic
transmission 63
Intermittent wiper mode 66
J
Jacking points 215
Joystick, refer to iDrive 16
Jump starting 218
K
Keyless-Go, refer to Comfort
access 37
Keyless opening and closing,
refer to Comfort access 37
Key Memory, refer to Personal
Profile 29
"Keypad" 184
Keys 28
– key-related settings, refer to
Personal Profile 29
– spare key 28
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Reference
241
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Kick-down
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 64
– SMG Sequential Manual
Transmission 62
Knee airbags 94
Knock control 199
L
Lamps, refer to Parking lamps/
low beams 102
Lamps and bulbs 212
"Language / Units" 85
– for navigation
system 127, 143
"Languages" 85
– for navigation
system 127, 143
Lashing eyes, refer to
Securing cargo 123
Last destinations, refer to
Destination list 135
"Last seat pos." 51
LATCH child restraint fixing
system 58
LEDs light-emitting
diodes 212
Length, refer to
Dimensions 224
License plate lamps, replacing
bulbs 215
Light-emitting diodes
LEDs 212
Lighter 116
"Lighting" 66, 103
Lighting
– instruments 104
– lamps and bulbs 212
– of the vehicle, refer to
Lamps 102
Light switch 102
"Limit" 82
Loading, refer to Cargo
loading 122
Load securing equipment,
refer to Securing cargo 123
"Lock after driving" 33
Lock buttons in the doors,
refer to Locking 33
Locking 31
– confirmation signals 31
– from inside 33
– from outside 31
– without key, refer to Comfort
access 37
Locking and unlocking doors
– confirmation signals 31
– from inside 32
– from outside 30
Low beams 102
– automatic 102
– replacing bulbs 212
Lower back support, refer to
Lumbar support 49
Luggage compartment
– capacity 226
– emergency release 35
– hotel function 33
– increasing capacity,
Convertible 35
– opening/closing, refer to
Luggage compartment
lid 34
– opening from inside 34
– opening from outside 34
– opening with remote
control 31
Luggage compartment lid 34
– comfort access 38
– emergency operation 34
– emergency release 35
– opening from inside 34
– opening from outside 34
– opening with remote
control 31, 34
– unlocking manually 34
Lumbar support 49
LW, waveband 156
M
M+S tires, refer to Winter
tires 205
Maintenance 210
– refer to Service and
Warranty Information
Booklet for US models 210
– refer to Service
requirements 78
– refer to Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models 210
Maintenance system 210
Malfunction
– convertible top 44
– door lock 32
– driver's door 32
– fuel filler door 198
– glass sunroof 41
– hotel function 34
– luggage compartment lid 34
Malfunction warnings, refer to
Check Control 80
Manual air distribution 108
Manual mode with automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 64
"Manual" on the radio 157
Manual operation
– convertible top 44
– door lock 32
– driver's door 32
– fuel filler door 198
– glass sunroof 41
– hotel function 34
– luggage compartment lid 34
– selector lever interlock,
Automatic transmission 64
Manual transmission 61
"Map direction of travel" 142
"Map facing north" 142
Map for navigation
– changing scale 142
– destination entry 133
Map view 142
Map view facing north 142
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
242
Master key, refer to Keys/
remote control 28
Maximum cooling 109
Maximum speed with winter
tires 205
Measurements, refer to
Dimensions
– Convertible 225
– Coupe 224
Memory, refer to Seat, mirror
and steering wheel
memory 50
MENU, button refer to Start
menu 17
Menus, refer to iDrive 16
Message list for traffic
information 145
Microfilter 110
Microphone
– for mobile phone 14
– for voice command
system 14
Mirror dimming feature 54
Mirrors 54
– automatic curb monitor 54
– folding in and out 54
– heating 54
– memory, refer to Seat, mirror
and steering wheel
memory 50
"Missed calls" 182
Missed calls 183
Mobile communications
devices in vehicle 121
Mobile phone
– accepted calls 183
– adjusting volume 180
– calling 181
– ending call 181
– installation location, refer to
Center armrest 114
– missed calls 183
– operation by voice 185
– operation via iDrive 180
– redialing 183
– refer to separate operating
instructions
– Top 8 183
– touch tone dialing, refer to
Tone dialing method 184
Mobile phone battery 188
Mobile phones, use in vehicle,
refer to Mobile
communications devices in
vehicle 121
Mobile Service, refer to
Roadside Assistance 218
Monitor, refer to iDrive 16
Monitoring pressure of tires,
refer to Flat Tire Monitor 89
"Monitor on / off" 56
Most recent mobile phone
numbers 183
MP3, compressed audio
files 165
Multifunction steering wheel,
refer to Buttons on steering
wheel 11
Multifunction switch
– refer to Turn signals/
headlamp flasher 65
– refer to Wiper system 66
Music tracks
– random play sequence 168
– sampling, scan 167
"Mute on / off" 56
MW, waveband 156
N
"Navigation" 77, 128
Navigation destination
– entering manually 128
– selecting via map 133
Navigation drive, installation
location 126
Navigation DVD 126
Navigation instructions, refer
to Switching voice
instructions on/off 143
Navigation system 126
– address book 136
– bypassing route
sections 144
– destination entry 128
– destination guidance in
assistance window 126
– destination list 135
– displaying current
position 148
– displaying route 141
– entering a destination
manually 128
– entering destination via
voice 131
– last destinations 135
– looking for interesting
destination 134
– navigation DVD 126
– route list 142
– selecting destination using
information 134
– selecting destination via
map 133
– selecting route criteria 138
– starting destination
guidance 140
– switching off, refer to
Terminating/continuing
destination guidance 140
– terminating/continuing
destination guidance 140
– voice instructions 143
– volume adjustment 144
"Navigation voice
instructions" 56, 127, 143
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Reference
243
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Neck support, refer to Front
head restraints 51
"New address" for navigation
system 136
"New destination" 128, 133
New remote controls 28
"New route" 144
New wheels and tires 204
"Next entertainment
source" 56
Night Vision, refer to
BMW Night Vision 99
Night vision device, refer to
BMW Night Vision 99
"Night Vision off" 101
"Night Vision on / off" 56
Nozzles
– refer to Ventilation 109
– refer to Windshield washer
nozzles 67
Nylon rope, refer to Tow-
starting and towing 219
O
OBD socket, refer to Socket
for OBD Onboard
Diagnostics interface 211
Octane ratings, refer to Fuel
specifications 199
Odometer 75
Oil, refer to Engine oil 207
Oil change intervals
– refer to Service
requirements 78
– refer to the Service and
Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or to
the Warranty and Service
Guide Booklet for Canadian
models
"On a new destination" for
navigation system 134
"Onboard info" 77
Onboard monitor, refer to
iDrive 16
Onboard tool kit 212
"On destination" 134
"On location" 134
Opening and closing
– comfort access 37
– from inside 32
– from outside 30
– using door lock 32
– using the remote control 30
Operating principle, iDrive 17
Operation by voice for mobile
phone 185
– adjusting volume 186
– canceling 185
– commands 185
– correcting phone
number 186
– dialing phone number 186
– placing a call 186
– redialing 187
– voice phone book 186
"Options" 193
Orientation menu, refer to
Start menu 17
Outside air, refer to AUC
Automatic recirculated-air
control 109
Outside temperature
display 75
– changing unit of measure 85
Overview
– operating principle 17
– radio control 152
– screen display 20
P
Panic mode 31
Park Distance Control PDC 86
"Parked car operation" 110
"Parked car ventilation" 110
Parked car ventilation
– activating activation
times 111
– setting activation time 110
– switching on and off
directly 110
Parked car ventilation system,
LED 106
Parking, vehicle 60
Parking aid, refer to PDC Park
Distance Control 86
Parking assistant, refer to
PDC Park Distance
Control 86
Parking brake, refer to
Handbrake 61
Parking lamps 102
– replacing bulbs 213
Parts and accessories 6
Passenger-side exterior
mirror, tilting down 54
"Pathway lighting" 103
Pathway lighting 102
"PDC" 87
"PDC display on" 87
PDC Park Distance Control 86
Personal Profile 29
"Perspective" 142
"Phone" 176, 178, 181
Phone book 180
– changing entry 182
– creating and editing voice
phone book 186
– deleting all entries 183
– deleting entry 183
– dialing phone number 182
Phone numbers
– deleting from phone
book 183
– dialing 181
– most recent numbers 183
– selecting in phone book 183
– Top 8 183
Pinch protection system
– glass sunroof 41
– power windows 40
Plasters, refer to First-aid
kit 218
Plastic, refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
"Play" on the radio 163
Plugin unit for remote control,
refer to Ignition lock 59
Pollen, refer to Microfilter/
activated-charcoal filter
110
Position
– displaying 148
– storing 136
Power failure 215
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
244
Power windows, refer to
Windows 39
"Presets" on the
radio 156, 163
Presetting parked car
ventilation activation
times 110
Pressure, tires 200
Pressure monitoring of tires,
refer to TPM Tire Pressure
Monitor 91
"Profile" 195
Programmable buttons on
steering wheel 55
Protective function, refer to
Pinch protection system
– glass sunroof 41
– windows 40
R
Radiator fluid, refer to
Coolant 209
Radio
– Autostore 157
– controls 152
– High Definition Radio 160
– sampling stations 157
– satellite radio 162
– selecting frequency
manually 157
– selecting
waveband 152, 156
– station search 157
– station selection 156
– station with best
reception 157
– storing stations 158
– switching on/off 152
– tone control 153
– volume 153
– Weather Band, refer to
Weather news flashes 160
Radio key, refer to Keys/
remote control 28
Radio position, refer to Radio
readiness 59
Radio readiness 59
– switched off 59
– switched on 59
– with comfort access 38
Radio stations, storing 158
Rain sensor, windshield wiper
system 66
"Random", random play
sequence 168
"Random all" in audio
mode 168
"Random directory" in audio
mode 168
Random play sequence
– CD changer 168
– CD player 168
"RDS" 159
Reading lamps 105
Rear lamps, refer to Tail
lamps 214
Rearview mirrors, refer to
Mirrors 54
Rear window
– heating 108
– opening and closing 40
"Received calls" 182
Reception
– quality 159
– radio stations 159
– regional station 157
Reception quality of mobile
phone, refer to Status
information 20
Rechargeable flashlight 113
Recirculated-air mode, refer
to AUC Automatic
recirculated-air control 109
Recirculation of air, refer to
AUC Automatic
recirculated-air control 109
Reclining seat, refer to
Seats 49
Recording times, refer to
Stopwatch 83
"Redial" for mobile phone 182
Redialing with mobile
phone 187
Reflectors, refer to Tail
lamps 214
Refueling 198
Releasing, hood 206
Releasing the locks, refer to
Unlocking 37
"Relock door if not
opened" 33
Remaining distance, refer to
Cruising range 76
Remaining distance to
destination, refer to
Computer 77
Remote control 28
– battery replacement 38
– comfort access 37
– garage-door opener 112
– luggage compartment lid 31
– malfunction 31, 38
Removing condensation from
windows 108
"Repeat directory" in audio
mode 168
"Repeat" in audio mode 168
"Repeat track" in audio
mode 168
Replacement fuses 216
Replacement remote control,
refer to New remote
controls 28
Replacing bulbs, refer to
Lamps and bulbs 212
Replacing tires, changing a
wheel 215
Reporting safety defects 7
Required fuel 199
Reserve warning, refer to Fuel
gauge 76
"Reset" 90, 92
– stopwatch 83
– tone settings 155
Reset, refer to Resetting tone
settings 155
Residual heat 109
Restraint systems
– for children 57
– refer to Safety belts 53
Retreaded tires
204
Reverse, fast
– CD changer 168
– CD player 168
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Reference
245
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Reverse gear
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 63
– manual transmission 61
– SMG Sequential Manual
Transmission 62
Road map 142
"Roadside
Assistance" 184, 190
Roadside Assistance 218
Roadside parking lamps 104
– replacing bulbs, refer to
Parking lamps 213
Rollover protection system on
Convertible 96
– lowering 96
Rope, refer to Tow-starting
and towing 219
Rotary/pushbutton, refer to
iDrive 16
Route 138
– bypassing sections 144
– changing 144
– changing criteria 138
– display 141
– displaying arrow display 141
– displaying map view 142
– displaying streets or towns/
cities 142
– selecting 138
Route information, refer to
Destination guidance with
voice instructions 143
Route map, refer to Displaying
map view 142
"Route preference",
changing 138
Route selection 138
RSC Runflat System
Component, refer to Run-
flat tires 204
Rubber parts, refer to Caring
for your vehicle brochure
Runflat System Component
RSC, refer to Run-flat
tires 204
Run-flat tires 204
– continuing driving with a
damaged tire 90, 92
– flat tire 90, 92
– Flat Tire Monitor 89
– tire inflation pressure 200
– Tire Pressure Monitor 91
– tire replacement 204, 205
– winter tires 205
S
Safety belts 53
– damage 53
– indicator lamp 53
– refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
– reminder 53
– sitting safely 48
Safety belt tensioners, refer to
Safety belts 53
Safety systems
– ABS Antilock Brake
System 87
– airbags 94
– driving stability control
systems 87
– rollover protection system,
Convertible 96
– safety belts 53
Safety tires, refer to Run-flat
tires 204
Satellite radio 162
– enabling channels 162
– selecting channel 163
– storing channel 163
"SAT" with radio 152, 162
"Save current
destination" 138
"Scan"
– music tracks on CD 167
– stations with radio 157
Scan
– CD changer 167
– CD player 167
– radio 157
"Scan all" in audio mode 167
"Scan directory" in audio
mode 167
Screw thread for tow
fitting 219
SDARS, refer to Satellite
radio 162
Seats 49
– adjusting 49
– heating 53
– lumbar support 49
– memory, refer to Seat, mirror
and steering wheel
memory 50
– sitting safely 48
– sports seat 49
– storing the setting 50
– thigh support 49
Securing cargo 123
– ski bag 117
"Select as
destination" 134, 193
"Select current speed" 82
Selecting audio sources, refer
to Operating via iDrive 152
Selecting distance for active
cruise control 70
Selecting frequency
manually 157
Selecting menu items 19
Selecting route 138
Selection options with
navigation system 138
Selector lever
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 63
– manual transmission 61
– SMG Sequential Manual
Transmission 62
Selector lever interlock, refer
to Shiftlock
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 63
– SMG Sequential Manual
Transmission 62
Selector lever positions
– manual transmission 61
– SMG Sequential Manual
Transmission 62
Sequential Manual
Transmission SMG 61
"Service" 78, 191, 207
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
246
Service, refer to Roadside
Assistance 218
Service and Warranty
Information Booklet for
US models 210
Service Interval Display
– refer to CBS Condition
Based Service 210
– refer to Service
requirements 78
"Service notification" 191
"Service Request" 184, 191
"Service
requirements" 79, 191, 208
Service requirements 78
– refer to CBS Condition
Based Service 210
"Service Status" 195
"Set"
– in audio mode 152
– in trip computer 78
"Set date" 84
"Set service date" 79
"Set time" 84
Setting button, refer to
Controls, controller 16
"Settings" 195
– for BMW Assist 193
– for unlocking 30
Settings
– BMW Night Vision 100
– changing on Control
Display 83
– clock, 12h/24h mode 84
– configuring, refer to
Personal Profile 29
– date 84
– language 85
– units of measure 85
Settings menu, refer to
imenu17
Setting time, refer to
Preselecting activation
time 110
Shifting
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 63
– SMG Sequential Manual
Transmission 63
Shiftlock
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 63
– SMG Sequential Manual
Transmission 62
Shift paddles on steering
wheel 63
Short commands of voice
command system 227
"Short route" for
navigation
138
Short route in navigation, refer
to Selecting route 138
"Show current position" 133
"Show destination
position" 133
Side airbags 94
Side marker lamps, replacing
bulbs 214
Side turn signals, replacing
bulbs 214
Signal horn, refer to Horn 10
Signaling a turn, triple turn
signal activation 65
Sill panel lighting, refer to
Interior lamps 104
Sitting safely 48
– with airbags 48
– with head restraints 48
– with safety belts 48
Ski bag 116
Sliding/tilt roof, refer to Glass
sunroof, electric with raise
function 41
Slope assistant, refer to
Starting assistant 121
SMG Sequential Manual
Transmission 61
– acceleration assistant 65
– breaking-in 120
– Dynamic Driving Control 64
– gear display 62
– kick-down 62
– shiftlock 62
– towing 220
– tow-starting 221
Snap-in adapter
– mounting/removing 187
– using 174
Snow chains 205
Socket, refer to Connecting
electrical devices 116
Socket for Onboard
Diagnostics interface 211
Socket for remote control,
refer to Ignition lock 59
Soft closure aid, refer to
Automatic soft closing 34
Song search with CD, refer to
Sampling tracks, scan 167
SOS, refer to Initiating an
emergency call 217
Spare
– adapter for spare key 28
– fuses 216
– key 28
Special oils, refer to Approved
engine oils 208
Speed-dependent
volume 154
Speed limit warning, refer to
Speed limit 82
Speedometer
12
"Speed volume", refer to Tone
control 154
Speed with winter tires 205
Sport program
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 64
– refer to Dynamic Driving
Control 64
Stability control, refer to
Driving stability control
systems 87
"Star button" 56
Start/Stop button 59
– starting the engine 60
– switching off the engine 60
"Start" for stopwatch 83
"Start guidance" 131, 140
Starting assistant 121
Starting difficulties, jump
starting 218
Starting engine 60
Starting off on slopes, refer to
Starting assistant 121
Start menu, iDrive 17
"Start route guidance" 133
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Reference
247
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
"Start service" 190
"Start Service" for BMW
Assist 192
"State / Province" for
destination entry 129
"State inspection" 79
Station, refer to Radio 156
"Status" 79
Status information on Control
Display 20
Status of this Owner's Manual
at time of printing 5
Steering wheel
– adjustment 55
– automatic adjustment, refer
to Easy entry/exit 55
– automatic adjustment, refer
to Steering wheel
memory 50
– buttons on steering
wheel 11
– heating 55
– lock, refer to Ignition lock 59
– memory 50
– programmable buttons 55
– shift paddles 63
"Steering wheel buttons" 55
Steering-wheel shift buttons,
refer to Shift paddles 63
Steering with variable ratio,
refer to Active steering 94
Steptronic, refer to Automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 63
– sport program and manual
mode 64
"Stop" for stopwatch 83
"Stopwatch" 83
Stopwatch 83
Storage compartments 114
"Store in address book" for
navigation system 136
"Store" on the radio 158, 164
Storing current position 136
Storing radio stations 158
Storing sitting position, refer
to Seat, mirror and steering
wheel memory 50
Storing tires 205
"Street" for destination
entry 130
Summer tires, refer to Wheels
and tires 200
"Surround Settings", refer to
Tone control 154
SW, waveband 156
Switches, refer to Cockpit 10
Switching on
– audio 152
– CD changer 152
– CD player
152
– radio 152
Swiveling headlamps, refer to
Adaptive Head Light 103
Symbols 4
– indicator and warning
lamps 13
– navigation system 147
– status information 20
– traffic information with
navigation system 144
T
Tachometer 75
Tail lamps 214
– replacing bulbs 214
Tank capacity
– also refer to Capacities 226
– fuel tank capacity 198
Target cursor for
navigation 133
Technical alterations, refer to
For your own safety 6
Technical data 224
Telematics, refer to
BMW Assist 189
Telephone
– installation location, refer to
Center armrest 114
– refer to Mobile phone 174
– refer to separate operating
instructions
"Telephone list" 56
TeleService 191
Temperature
– adjusting in upper body
region 108
– adjusting with automatic
climate control 107
– changing units of
measure 85
– refer to Coolant
temperature 75
Temperature display
– changing units of
measure 85
– outside temperature 75
– outside temperature
warning 75
Temperature gauge, engine
oil 76
Tempomat, refer to Cruise
control 67
"Terminate services" 194
"Text language" 85
"Theater", refer to Tone
control 155
The individual vehicle 5
Tie-down points, refer to
Securing cargo 123
Tilt alarm sensor 36
– switching off 36
Tilting down passenger-side
exterior mirror 54
"Time" 84
"Time / Date" 83
"Time format" 84
Timer, refer to Preselecting
activation time 110
"Timer 1" for parked-car
ventilation 110
"Timer 2" for parked-car
ventilation 110
Tire inflation pressure 200
Tire pressure loss 90,
92
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 91
Tire Quality Grading 202
Tire replacement, new wheels
and tires 204
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
248
Tires
– age 202
– air loss 90, 92
– breaking-in 120
– condition 203
– damage 203
– inflation pressure 200
– minimum tread depth 203
– monitoring inflation
pressure, refer to Flat Tire
Monitor 89
– new wheels and tires 204
– pressure monitoring, refer to
Tire Pressure Monitor 91
– replacing 204
– retreaded tires 204
– run-flat tires 204
– size 201
– size, refer to The right
wheels and tires 204
– wear indicators 203
– wheel/tire combination 204
– winter tires 205
Tires with run-flat properties,
refer to Run-flat tires 204
TMC station, refer to Traffic
information 144
"Tone" 153
Tone dialing method 184
Tone in audio mode
– adjusting 153
– middle setting 155
Tone on locking/unlocking 31
Tools, refer to Onboard tool
kit 212
Top 42
"Top 8" for mobile phone 182
Touch tone dialing, refer to
Tone dialing method 184
Tow bar 220
Tow fitting 219
Towing 219
– methods 220
– tow fittings 219
– with automatic
transmission 220
– with manual
transmission 220
– with SMG Sequential
Manual Transmission 220
"Town / City" for destination
entry 129
Tow rope 220
Tow-starting 219
"TPM" 92
TPM Tire Pressure
Monitor
91
– resetting system 92
– system limits 91
– warning lamp 92
Tracks
– finding 167
– random play sequence 168
– sampling on CD 167
– selecting with CD 166
Track width, refer to
Dimensions 224
Traction-assist feature, refer
to DSC Dynamic Stability
Control 88
Traction control, refer to DSC
Dynamic Stability
Control 88
Traffic congestion
– displaying traffic
information 144
– refer to Bypassing route
sections 144
Traffic information for
navigation
– depiction in route map 146
– displaying 145
– during destination
guidance 147
– symbols 147
Traffic information with
navigation 144
"Traffic Info settings" 145
Transmission
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 63
– deactivating selector lever
interlock on automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 64
– manual transmission 61
– SMG Sequential Manual
Transmission 61
– starting assistant 121
– towing 220
Transporting children
safely 57
Transport securing device,
refer to Securing cargo 123
Tread depth, refer to Minimum
tread depth 203
Treble, refer to Tone
control 153
"Treble", tone control 153
"Trip computer" 78
Trip computer 77
Trip-distance counter, refer to
Trip odometer 75
"Triple turn signal" 66
Trip odometer 75
Trunk, refer to Luggage
compartment 35
Trunk lid, refer to Luggage
compartment lid 34
Turning circle, refer to
Dimensions 224
Turn signals
65
– replacing bulbs 213
U
Undercarriage protection,
refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
Uniform Tire Quality Grading/
UTQR 202
"Units" 85
Units
– average fuel
consumption 85
– temperature 85
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Reference
249
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Universal garage-door
opener, refer to Integrated
universal remote
control 112
Universal remote control, refer
to Integrated universal
remote control 112
"Unlock button" 30
Unlocking
– from inside 33
– from outside 30
– without key, refer to Comfort
access 37
Unlocking without key, refer to
Comfort access 37
"Update services" 193
"USB" in audio mode 171
"Use current location as
address" 136, 138
Used batteries
– refer to Disposal 215
– refer to Replacing battery 38
Using turn signals 65
V
Vehicle
– battery 215
– breaking-in 120
– care, refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
– cargo loading 122
– measurements, refer to
Dimensions 224
– parking 60
– washing, refer to Caring for
your vehicle brochure
– weights 226
"Vehicle / Tires" for
unlocking 30
Vehicle jack 215
– jacking points 215
Vehicle position, refer to
Displaying current
position 148
Ventilation 109
– draft-free 110
– for cooling 110
– parked car ventilation 110
Vent outlets of automatic
climate control 106
"Vent settings" 108
Viscosity 209
Voice, refer to Destination
guidance with voice
instructions 143
Voice command system
– overview 22
– short commands 227
Voice instructions for
navigation system 143
– muting 56
– repeating 56, 144
– switching on/off 56, 143
– volume 144
Voice phone book 186
Volume 152
– audio sources 152
– fuel tank, refer to
Capacities 226
– luggage compartment 226
– mobile phone 180
– setting speed-
dependent 154
– voice instructions 144
– windshield cleaning system,
refer to Capacities 226
Volume adjustment in audio
mode
– front-to-rear 154
– right/left 154
W
Warning lamps, refer to
Indicator and warning
lamps 13
Warning messages, refer to
Check Control 80
Warning triangle 217
Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian
models 210
Washer fluid
– capacity of the reservoir 67
– wiper system 67
Water on roads, refer to
Driving through water 121
Waveband for radio 156
"WB" 152, 160
Wear indicators in tires, refer
to Minimum tread depth 203
Weather news flashes 160
Website BMW 4
Weights 226
Wheel/tire combination, refer
to New wheels and tires 204
Wheel/tire damage 203
Wheel/tire replacement, refer
to New wheels and tires 204
Wheelbase, refer to
Dimensions 224
Wheels and tires 200
Width, refer to
Dimensions 224
Wind deflector 46
Windows 39
– comfort closing with comfort
access 37
– comfort operation 31, 32
– opening and closing,
Convertible 39
– opening and closing,
Coupe 39
– rear window, Convertible 40
Windshield
– cleaning, refer to Wiper
system 66
– defrosting, refer to
Defrosting windows 108
– displays, refer to Head-Up
Display 97
Windshield wash
– automatic, refer to Rain
sensor 66
– capacities, reservoir 226
– filler neck for washer
fluid 207
– nozzles 67
– washer fluid 67
– wiper system 66
Windshield wipers, refer to
Wiper system 66
– care, refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
– replacing wiper blades
212
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
250
Winter tires 205
– setting speed limit 82
– storage 205
Wiper blades
– care, refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
– replacing 212
Wiper system 66
– rain sensor 66
– washer fluid 67
– windshield washer
nozzles 67
"With highways" for
navigation system 138
Wood decoration, refer to
Caring for your vehicle
brochure
Word matching principle for
navigation 139
Working in the engine
compartment 206
Wrenches/screwdrivers, refer
to Onboard tool kit 212
X
Xenon lamps 212
– replacing bulbs 212
Y
Your individual vehicle
– programmable buttons on
steering wheel 55
– settings, refer to Personal
Profile 29
Z
"Zoom" with BMW Night
Vision 101
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
01 41 0 013 312 ue
*BL0013312004*
The Ultimate
Driving Machine
More about BMW
bmwusa.com
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 312 - © 02/07 BMW AG
